JP2020157152A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To solve the problem that a jackpot game may be delayed in the meantime only by eliminating ball clogging by simply performing retry operation or the like in the jackpot game, and a delay in the jackpot game may cause a player to decrease interest in a game while a conventional game machine has control for eliminating ball clogging by executing predetermined retry operation when the ball clogging occurs.SOLUTION: Characteristic control processing is performed in confirmation processing at the time of completion of a round game, thus rapidly and smoothly progressing a jackpot game and enhancing interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 50

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, if the identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a predetermined profit can be given to the player. There are known players who play special games. In this type of gaming machine, in addition to the special game, the fluctuation time of the identification information is shorter than usual, the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is higher than usual, and the identification information is in a specific mode. There are some that can give a predetermined privilege to a player, such as making the probability of being stopped displayed higher than usual.

Regarding the granting of this privilege, a game ball that has entered a predetermined variable entry port during a special game is distributed to a specific area or a non-specific area by a distribution device in the variable entry port, and the game ball passes through the specific area. There is a known gaming machine that grants a privilege when this is done (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-161615

If a sorting device is provided inside the variable ball entry port as in Patent Document 1, a game ball may be caught in a movable portion of the sorting device, causing ball clogging. When such a situation occurs, in the worst case, the game ball that has entered the variable entrance may not be distributed to the specific area side, and the player may miss the opportunity to give the privilege. Further, conventionally, in a game machine having a discharge device such as a payout device, when such a ball jam occurs, there is a game machine having a control for eliminating the ball jam by executing a predetermined retry operation. ..

However, in the big hit game, there is a possibility that the big hit game may be stagnant in the middle simply by performing a retry operation or the like to solve a problem such as a ball jam. In addition, if the jackpot game is stagnant, the player may lose the interest in the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to allow a jackpot game to proceed quickly and smoothly and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game that changes the variable entrance port to a ball-entry state, and
A ball entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entry port, and
The first discharge detecting means and the second discharge detecting means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball entry detecting means, and
A movable member that guides a game ball detected by the ball entry detection means to a specific region or a non-specific region by performing a predetermined operation is provided.
A game machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball passing through the specific area.
The first emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball passing through the non-specific area.
The second emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball passing through the specific area.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
As the round game, at least
A specific round game in which the variable entry port can be entered and the game ball can be guided to a specific area or a non-specific area.
It has a non-specific round game that guides the game ball to a non-specific area while making the variable entry port capable of entering the ball.
In the case of executing the predetermined round game, after the last ball-entry state in the round game is completed, the variable entry port is set to the ball-incapable state and the predetermined confirmation process is executed.
In the confirmation process, at least
Whether or not the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls in the round game match is based on the detection results of the entry detecting means, the first discharging detecting means, and the second discharging detecting means. Match judgment processing and
It has a movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entering the variable ball entry port and the number of ejected balls do not match in the match determination process.
As the special game, the specific round game and the non-specific round game are included, and the specific round game is executed next to the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game, and the non-specific round game is executed thereafter. With a first special game with a pattern to perform a specific round game,
When the first special game is executed, the confirmation process is executed in the specific round game executed after the non-specific round game, and the non-specific round executed after the last specific round game. It is characterized in that the match determination process and the movable member operation process are not executed in the game.

According to such a game machine, in a special game having a pattern in which a specific round game is executed after the non-specific round game and then the non-specific round game is executed, the specific round game executed after the non-specific round game is executed. The confirmation process is to be performed in. On the other hand, in the special game, the specific round game is not executed after that, that is, in the non-specific round game executed after the last specific round game, the match determination process and the movable member operation process included in the confirmation process are performed. It is not supposed to be executed.

As a result, by preventing unnecessary processing depending on the situation, it is possible to simplify the processing after all the opening operations in the round game are completed, and to allow the jackpot game to proceed smoothly and quickly.

Further, the gaming machine of the second invention is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game that changes the variable entrance port to a ball-entry state, and
A ball entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entry port, and
The first discharge detecting means and the second discharge detecting means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball entry detecting means, and
A movable member that guides a game ball detected by the ball entry detection means to a specific region or a non-specific region by performing a predetermined operation is provided.
A game machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball passing through the specific area.
The first emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball passing through the non-specific area.
The second emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball passing through the specific area.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
As the round game, at least
A specific round game in which the variable entry port can be entered and the game ball can be guided to a specific area or a non-specific area.
It has a non-specific round game that guides the game ball to a non-specific area while making the variable entry port capable of entering the ball.
In the case of executing the predetermined round game, after the last ball-entry state in the round game is completed, the variable entry port is set to the ball-incapable state and the predetermined confirmation process is executed.
In the confirmation process, at least
Whether or not the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls in the round game match is based on the detection results of the entry detecting means, the first discharging detecting means, and the second discharging detecting means. Match judgment processing and
It has a movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entering the variable ball entry port and the number of ejected balls do not match in the match determination process.
As the special game, a special game having the specific round game and the non-specific round game, and having a pattern in which the specific round game is executed next to the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game. Prepare
The second emission detecting means has a valid period in which a privilege is given when a game ball is detected and an invalid period in which a privilege is not given even when a game ball is detected.
After finishing the last ball-entry state in the specific round game, the valid period is continued for the first period while the variable ball-entry port is in the ball-incapable state, and after the first period elapses, the invalid period is set. In the case of
After the invalid period is continued for the second period, the movable member operation process can be executed.
It is characterized in that the match determination process in the confirmation process is executed during the valid period after the end of the last ball-enterable state in the round game.

According to such a game machine, the valid period is continued for the first period after all the opening operations in the round game are completed. This is valid even when a game ball that has entered the variable entry port immediately before the end of the opening operation passes through a specific area at a timing after the variable entry port becomes unable to enter. It is intended to be treated as something (giving benefits). However, since such a situation is a rare case, the match determination process is executed without waiting for the expiration of the valid period, and if it is determined to be a match, the confirmation process is completed to facilitate the jackpot game. Moreover, it is possible to proceed quickly. On the other hand, even if it is determined that there is a mismatch, the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times before the start of the movable member operation process, so that the game ball has passed through the specific area during the originally normal period (during the valid period). Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the movable member operation process is executed as much as possible.

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to advance the big hit game quickly and smoothly and improve the game interest.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of big hit and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a large winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart of the input / discharge number match determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the start ball entry processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the fluctuation production start. It is a flowchart of a specific effect start process. It is a schematic diagram of the 2nd prize-winning apparatus. It is a table showing the correspondence between the jackpot type and the ending time. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the opening pattern of a 7R 4th jackpot and the opening pattern of a 7R 5th jackpot. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between a V attacker and a specific area in a V round. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between a V attacker (short opening) and a specific area in a V round. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between a V attacker (long opening) and a specific area in a V round. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display mode of the specific effect performed by an image display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display mode of the specific effect performed by an image display device. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (big hit game) of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the first grand prize opening closing process of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the 2nd big prize opening closing process of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the input / discharge number matching determination process of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the round counter subtraction process of Example 2. It is a timing chart which shows in the big hit game of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing of Example 3. It is a table which shows the confrontation effect pattern determination table of Example 3. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the 7R 4th jackpot and the opening pattern of the 7R 5th jackpot according to the modification 1 of the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the 7R 4th jackpot and the opening pattern of the 7R 5th jackpot according to the modification 2 of the first embodiment. It is a table showing the correspondence between the jackpot type and the ending effect.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is detachably configured from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported on one side end side and are configured to be openable and closable, respectively.

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching the game ball with a firing intensity according to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 has a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively, these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during the execution of the game effect that is executed as the game progresses. Therefore, a simple "directing button 63") is provided. As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detection means (for example, an input detection means in which the player can directly contact the button portion to input the input can be detected. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. Good. The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected in the game area 3. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

An image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an “effect symbol display unit”) on which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbol 8”) are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect symbol display area 7b is composed of, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed on the first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as "first special symbol display unit") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variation display of the first special symbol and the result of the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit") (that is, the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct). (Simply referred to as "win / fail judgment") is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information".

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, a triple-digit identical doublet (also called a "big hit effect symbol") such as "777", a preset chance symbol such as "135", or " It is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with a special symbol (also referred to as "special symbol") such as "3 ★ 3". In addition, in the case of deviation, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" may be stopped and displayed with a different pattern (also referred to as "off effect symbol"). It is possible. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. See and grasp the effect symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b. Then, in the first embodiment, for the jackpots other than the 2R jackpot and the 7R jackpot, which will be described later, the symbol confirmation effect when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is, for example, the display screen 7a (effect). The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the symbol display area 7b), and the like, and the player can easily recognize the occurrence of the jackpot (first effect mode). The 2R jackpot and the 7R jackpot are performed. For example, it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of a big hit by displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in a small stop display or shortening the stop display time at the corner of the display screen 7a (second effect mode). It is supposed to be done at. It is not necessary to separately provide the positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas may be the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). .. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol, for example, there is a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, and the like.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect (effect pattern game effect) using the effect pattern as described above, a big hit game effect executed in association with the big hit game and a waiting for customers Demonstration effects etc. are displayed. In addition, in the production symbol game production, the jackpot game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are displayed. Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of storages of the first special figure hold described later is displayed. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold or the second effect hold, the number of stored first special figure hold and the second special figure display displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member falls downward with the execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting, and the movable decoration The member covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the member becomes visible. As a result, the player will have a higher expectation for the hit. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct are acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct (first special symbol is correct or not). Judgment) is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

To the right of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port”) provided with a variable second start port 21 that changes the ease of entering the game ball. It is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the accuracy of the second special symbol is determined (the second special symbol is determined). ) Is executed, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member (blade member) 23, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. is there. The movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It does not have to be incapable of entering the ball.

To the right of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, a first large winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entrance") provided with a first large winning opening 30 and a second large winning opening 35 A second big winning device 36 (also referred to as a “second variable ball opening”) is provided, and in the first embodiment, the true of the first big winning device 31 (first big winning opening 30). The second big winning device 36 (second big winning opening 35) is arranged above. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30 by operating the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first variable entry port 31 is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32. It can be changed to.

Further, the second special winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens and closes the second special winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second variable entry port 36 is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37. It can be changed to. In addition, the second special winning device 36 identifies the specific area 39 and the non-specific area 49 through which the game ball entered in the second large winning opening 35 can pass, and the game ball entered in the second large winning opening 35. It is configured to include a movable piece 150 for guiding (distributing) to the region 39 or the non-specific region 49. The movable piece 150 is driven by a movable piece solenoid 151 (see FIG. 5), and the movable piece 150 is triggered by the opening of the second large winning opening 35, in other words, the opening operation of the opening / closing member 37. The operation is started. When the movable piece solenoid 151 is OFF, that is, when the movable piece 150 is not operating (non-operating state), the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 is guided to the non-specific area 49 and is guided to the specific area 49. It becomes impossible to pass through 39. On the other hand, when the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON, that is, when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state), the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 is guided to the specific area 39 and is guided to the specific area 39. It is possible to pass through 39. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the high probability state described later is generated based on the detection that at least one of the gaming balls that have entered the second major winning opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39. .. That is, the specific area 39 is a probabilistic operation port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first large winning device 31. Details of the opening of the second prize opening 35 (opening operation of the opening / closing member 37) and the operation of the movable piece 150 will be described later. The high probability state is one of the game benefits given to the player separately from the special game.

A gate 28 (game ball passage port) through which a game ball can pass is provided in the right side area of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, it is normally determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is opened. The normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner as the symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, a plurality of general entry ports 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. A method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called a left-handed hit, and a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called a right-handed hit. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game is started, the ball is left-handed to enter the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to a hit in the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first starting port 20, the gate 28, the second starting port 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second The aim is to enter the big winning opening 35. Then, when a game ball enters the first start opening, the second start opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening, and the general entry opening, each entry opening is predetermined. A number of game balls (also called "prize balls") are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of normal symbols are included. Further, the main display 40 has a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of 2 special figure hold) and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. When the result is a hit, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the launch direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the player should hit the ball or hit the ball to the left. The various indicators included in these main indicators 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed, and the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 by the stopped displayed special symbol (stop symbol). The result of the lottery based on (special symbol winning / failing judgment, big hit lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information, specific mode) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as stopped is displayed. A special game (big hit game) is performed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is the first jackpot (15R jackpot), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R first jackpot symbol). Further, when the second big hit (12R big hit) is reached, the three LEDs of "ijk" are turned on and the rest are turned off (12R second big hit symbol). In addition, when the third big hit (12R big hit) is reached, the three LEDs of "ijl" are turned on and the rest are turned off (12R third big hit symbol). When the 4th big hit (7R big hit) is reached, the 4 LEDs of "jnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R 4th big hit symbol). In addition, when the 5th big hit (7R big hit) is reached, the 4 LEDs of "mnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R 5th big hit symbol). In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" are turned on and the rest are turned off (off symbol). On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. For example, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is the sixth big hit (15R big hit), the three LEDs of "abd" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R sixth big hit symbol). In addition, when the 7th big hit (2R big hit) is reached, the four LEDs of "cdeh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R 7th big hit symbol). In addition, when the 8th big hit (2R big hit) is reached, the three LEDs of "cdgh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R 8th big hit symbol). In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "eh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (off symbol). Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (“acquisition information”” such as a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is based on the entry. The acquired information (also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 85a as the first special figure hold, and if the ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special figure is reserved. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as a hold. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbol. Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is correct for the incoming ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

Then, the number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●".

Further, when the number of holds is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds 1 to 1 No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuatingly for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the LED of "t" is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. It should be noted that the off-normal symbol is not a specific ordinary symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time, and the variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off. is there.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired based on the passage, and various acquired information is acquired. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four.

The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passage, that is, when the variation display of the normal symbol is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number up to a predetermined number. Then, the number of such a normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. is there. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Further, the number of holds 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (also referred to as a “main control unit”, which is also referred to as a “game control unit”) that controls game profits such as a special symbol winning / failing determination, a normal symbol winning / failing determination, and a transition of a game state. ”), Sub-control board 90 (also referred to as“ sub-control unit ”and“ effect control unit ”) that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and payout control that controls the payout of the game ball. Substrate 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”), effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, symbol displayed on the effect display 102, effect 1 special figure hold display 103a, and effect 2 special figure. It includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) and the like that control the display of the hold display 103b and the like. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with a storage case for an image control board or the like that houses the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and the sub control board that houses the sub control board 90 is stored on the storage case for the image control board or the like. A case is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and signals are output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and non-specific. The area sensor 49a and the general entry sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35, and detects the game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 among the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 35. is there. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in the non-specific area 49 in the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 49 among the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 35. Is what you do. The general entry port sensor 27a is provided in each general entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general entry port 27.

Further, as solenoids, a second starting port solenoid 24, a first large winning opening solenoid 33, a second large winning opening solenoid 38, and a movable piece solenoid 151 are connected. These various solenoids are also referred to as "driving means". The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22, and the first winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first winning device 31. is there. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36, and the movable piece solenoid 151 is for driving the movable piece 150 of the second prize-winning device 36. is there. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a general drawing. The hold indicator 44, the round indicator 45, the game status indicator 46, the launch direction indicator 47, and the hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is stored in a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (a prepaid card (game value storage medium) installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 and inserted). (A device that enables ball lending based on the information provided) is connected, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. It drives and pays out prize balls and pays out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launch device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch sensor 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 rotates the launch handle 60. Detect the amount. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the effect 1 special figure hold display 103a, and the effect 2 hold display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols, hold symbols, etc.). And image data such as background images are stored. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the effect symbol 8, and turns on / off the two LEDs or combines the colors to produce the effect symbol. Stop display is performed in a display mode showing the display result of 8 (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination). Further, the effect 1 special figure hold indicator 103a and the effect 2 hold indicator 103b are also composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs, or by combining colors, the effect 1st special figure hold indicator 103a is displayed on the 1st effect hold display area 9c by the number of holds and the 1st special figure hold indicator 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds to be displayed. Further, the effect second special figure hold indicator 103b is displayed in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Be controlled. This is to display the character symbol on substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or operate the movable decorative member 14 to display the character symbol on substantially the entire effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol display unit) on the display screen 7a. By covering the effect symbol, the first effect hold display unit, or a part or all of the second effect hold display unit may not be visible, such a display is provided. .. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and the lighting of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, on the sub-control board 90, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 such as the corresponding effect button detection switch.

Next, the control related to the hit / fail determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, there are "big hit" and "miss". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41, and at the time of "off", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. If it is determined to be a big hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. A special game that is executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game".

There are multiple types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of jackpots include "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "12R 2nd jackpot", "12R 3rd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot", and "7R 5th jackpot". There are a total of eight types, "15R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot". "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 6th jackpot" are jackpots in which the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big prize opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times, and "12R first big hit". "2 jackpots" and "12R 3rd jackpots" are jackpots with 12 open times (number of rounds) of the jackpots (1st jackpot 30 or 2nd jackpot 35), and are "7R 4th jackpots". And "7R 5th big hit" is a big hit with 7 big hits (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), "2R 7th big hit" and "2R" The "eighth big hit" is a big hit in which the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) is two times. In each of these big hits, only the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) is opened while the first big winning opening 30 is closed in the first and second rounds, and the third and subsequent rounds are odd rounds. The first big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) and the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) are opened in even rounds. That is, after the third round, the first large winning opening 30 (lower large winning opening) and the second large winning opening 35 (upper large winning opening) are alternately opened (large shown in FIG. 6). Refer to the opening order column of the winning opening opening pattern). A predetermined interval time (closing time) is set between each round. In the first embodiment, the interval time between the first round and the second round, and the second round and the third round are set. The interval time between the rounds is 2000 ms (2 seconds), and the interval time between the other rounds is 200 ms (0.2 seconds).

Here, the big winning opening opening pattern during the big hit game will be described. First, in the odd-numbered rounds after the third round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened until 25,000 ms (25 seconds) elapses from the start of the round, and is closed after 25,000 ms (25 seconds) elapses to end the round. That is, the first large winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern with an opening time of 25,000 ms and an opening number of once. By hitting right into the first large winning opening 30 opened in this opening pattern, it is possible to easily enter a game ball. In the odd round, the second big winning opening 35 is kept in a closed state (a state in which the ball cannot be entered, a state in which the game ball cannot be accepted). On the other hand, in the even-numbered rounds after the third round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened until 16000 ms (16 seconds) elapses from the start of the round, and then 1000 ms (1 second) is closed between each opening. At the same time, one opening of 1000 ms (1 second), one opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds), and two opening of 1000 ms (1 second) are performed in this order, and then the round is ended. That is, the second large winning opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern of an opening time of 23000 ms (second time) and an opening number of five times (second number of times). By hitting right into the second big winning opening 35 that opens with this opening pattern, it is possible to easily enter a game ball at the time of opening the first 16000 ms (16 seconds), and at other times of opening. There may be cases where the ball is balled and cases where the ball is not entered. In the even-numbered rounds, the first big winning opening 30 is kept in a closed state (a state in which the ball cannot be entered, a state in which the game ball cannot be accepted).

Further, in the second round, the second large winning opening 35 is opened, and the movable piece 150 is operated when the opening is started (the first opening is started). Then, among the above-mentioned eight types of jackpots, "15R 1st jackpot", "15R 6th jackpot", "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" are specified areas. It is a big hit that opens the second big winning opening 35 in a manner that makes it easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through 39 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passing big hit"). On the other hand, for "12R 3rd jackpot", "7R 5th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot", the 2nd jackpot 35 is opened in a manner in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. It is a big hit to open (hereinafter also referred to as "V unpassed big hit"). Explaining the opening mode of the second big winning opening 35 and the operating mode of the movable piece 150 in the second round, in the "V passing planned jackpot", the opening / closing operation mode (opening pattern) of the second big winning opening 35 in the second round. ) Is the same mode as the even-numbered rounds after the third round described above. Then, the operation control of the movable piece 150 is started with the opening (first opening) when the second large winning opening 35 is opened until 16000 ms (16 seconds) elapses from the start of the round. Specifically, when 80 ms have passed from the start of the first opening (that is, the start of the round) of the second large winning opening 35, the operating state (movable piece solenoid 151 is turned on) and then the non-operating state (movable). One-sided solenoid 151 is turned off), and when 2840 ms (about 2.8 seconds) elapses, the operating state (movable one-sided solenoid 151 is turned on) is set again, and this state is set to a maximum of 26000 ms (26 seconds). Maintain (see FIG. 52). For this reason, in the "V passing planned jackpot", the movable piece 150 is continuously in the operating state when 3000 ms (3 seconds) has passed from the start of the second round, so that 16000 ms (16 seconds) from the start of the second round. During the latter 13000 ms (13 seconds), the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 can pass through the specific area 39. In addition, even after the opening of 16000 ms (16 seconds) is completed, one opening of 1000 ms (1 second), one opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds), and 1000 ms (1000 ms) with a closure of 1000 ms (1 second) in between. Since the opening of 1 second) is performed twice in order, the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 at the time of opening can also pass through the specific area 39. As a result, the "V-passing planned jackpot" becomes a jackpot with a high probability that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends will be a high-probability state described later. It should be noted that such an opening pattern, that is, the opening time 23000 ms (second time), the opening number of times 5 times (second number of times), the opening pattern (second opening operation) opens, and the second big winning opening 35 is hit right. By performing the above, it is possible to easily enter the game ball at the time of opening the first 16000 ms (16 seconds), and there may be a case where the ball enters or a case where the ball does not enter at the time of other opening.

On the other hand, in the "V non-passing big hit", the movable piece 150 is controlled in the same manner as the "V passing big hit" from the start of the second round, and the second big winning opening 35 is 100 ms from the start of the second round ( It is opened (opens and closes for a moment) for 0.1 seconds) and then closed to end the round (see FIG. 51). That is, the second large winning opening 35 is opened in the opening pattern (third opening operation) in which the opening time is 100 ms (third time) and the number of times of opening is one (third number of times). Therefore, in the "V unpassed jackpot", the possibility that the game ball will enter the second big winning opening 35 in the second round is extremely low (substantially impossible), and the game ball is in the specific area 39. The possibility of passing through is extremely low (substantially impossible). As a result, the "V unpassed jackpot" is a jackpot with a low probability (no) that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends will be a high probability state described later, in other words, a normal state (low probability state) described later. It will be a big hit with a high probability. As described above, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the second round of the big hit game is set to the high probability state after the big hit game is completed based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 39. It is called a "privilege determination game".

Further, the second big winning opening 35 is opened even in the first round, but the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 is different depending on the type of big hit. That is, in the first round of the "15R first big hit" and the "15R sixth big hit", the second big winning opening 35 is opened a plurality of times, and the mode of the opening / closing operation is the third round described above. It is the same as the subsequent even rounds. Therefore, in the first round of the "15R first big hit" and the "15R sixth big hit", it is possible to easily put the game ball into the second big winning opening 35 by hitting right. In addition, the first round of "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" (V passing planned jackpot) is the above-mentioned "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (12R 3rd jackpot, 7R). The second big winning opening 35 is opened in the same manner as in the second round of the 5th big hit and the 2R 8th big hit). That is, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) from the start of the round, and then closed to end the round. Therefore, in the first round of "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" (V passing planned jackpot), the opening time is 100ms (1st hour) and the number of opening times is 1 (1st). The second big winning opening 35 is opened in the opening pattern (first opening operation) of the number of times), and the possibility that the game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 is extremely low (substantially impossible). ..

In addition, the first round of "12R 3rd jackpot", "7R 5th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot" is the above-mentioned "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot". The second big winning opening 35 is opened a plurality of times in a manner in which the first round and the second round are connected (see FIG. 49). That is, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 in the first round of "12R 3rd big hit", "7R 5th big hit" and "2R 8th big hit" which are "V unpassed big hits" is "V passing". The first round opening pattern (first opening operation) and the second round opening pattern (second opening operation) of "12R 2nd big hit", "7R 4th big hit" and "2R 7th big hit" which are "planned big hits" ), Including the interval time (2000 ms in this case) during this period. Specifically, the second prize opening 35 is opened for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) from the start of the round (first open operation), closed for 2000 ms, opened for 16000 ms (16 seconds), and then 1000 ms. With the closing of (1 second) sandwiched between each opening, one opening of 1000ms (1 second), one opening of 4000ms (4 seconds), and two opening of 1000ms (1 second) ( The second opening operation) is performed in order. Therefore, in the first round of "12R 3rd jackpot", "7R 5th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot", apparently, "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" This is the same as when the first and second rounds of "big hit" are performed (end of the second round) (see FIG. 49). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" (for example, "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R 5th jackpot") having the same number of rounds. Then, in the first embodiment, the movable piece 150 (distribution member) for distributing whether or not to guide the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 to the specific area 39 is operated only in the second round. It is supposed to be made to work and not to be operated in other rounds. From this, for the player, when a big hit with the number of rounds of "12", "7", and "2" occurs, pay attention to the opening / closing operation of the second big winning opening 35 from the first round in the big hit game. Even if this is done, it is difficult to determine whether or not the game state after the end of the big hit game is in the high probability state described later (whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39).

The distribution probability of each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 35% for the 15R first jackpot, 5% for the 12R second jackpot, 30% for the 12R third jackpot, and 7R fourth. The jackpot is 10%, the 7R 5th jackpot is 20%, and when divided into the V-passing jackpot and the V-non-passing jackpot, the V-passing jackpot is 50% and the V-non-passing jackpot is 50%. There is. On the other hand, the distribution probability of each big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 60% for the 15R first big hit, 20% for the 2R 7th big hit, and 20% for the 2R 8th big hit. When divided into a V-passing jackpot and a V-non-passing jackpot, the V-passing jackpot is 80% and the V-non-passing jackpot is 20%. That is, when a big hit is obtained by the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 21, which is facilitated by the operation of the opening extension function (generation of a high base state) described later. Compared to the case where a big hit is made by the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first starting port 20, there is a high possibility that the big hit will be a 15R big hit, and the possibility of a big hit scheduled to pass through V will be high. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played in the second starting port 21 rather than being a big hit in the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery of the first special symbol) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that a player who wins a big hit in the winning / failing judgment (big hit lottery of the second special symbol) performed when the ball enters is more likely to be advantageous to the player. That is, the player plays the game in anticipation of entering the second starting port 21. This is particularly remarkable during the operation of the open extension function in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and the type of big hit when a big hit is obtained. The determination is made based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of "0 to 629", and the random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of "0 to 99". In addition, the random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 include "variable pattern random numbers" in addition to the special symbol hit / fail determination random numbers and the jackpot type determination random numbers. (Also called "fluctuation pattern information") ".

The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of "0 to 198". Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct as shown in FIG. 7B. The random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (ordinary symbol lottery). Ordinary symbol random numbers take values in the range of "0 to 240".

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of gaming states by a combination in which each of the functions of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the open extension function for the special symbol and the normal symbol is in the activated state or the non-activated state. .. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is operating is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is called a "normal state (also called a" low probability state "). ". In the high probability state, the probability of being judged as a big hit in the special symbol hit / fail judgment is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the normal state, but in the high probability state, the jackpot judgment table for the high probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged as the jackpot is large is used. It is used to determine whether or not it is correct (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated.

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective entry into the starting port (entry that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may be operated at the same time, or only one of them may be operated. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbol. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the time saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed using the normal symbol hit judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (win random number) judged to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time saving state. (See FIG. 8 (C)). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Also, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8D). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state. That is, the function of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the non-time saving state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation once for 0.2 seconds, and the second starting port is opened during that period. Become. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the time saving state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

In the situation where the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the ordinary symbol, and the opening time extension function and the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared with the case where these functions are not operating. Therefore, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as "high frequency state"). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is referred to as the "high base state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is referred to as the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

The high base state (high frequency state) does not have to activate all the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22, the function is not activated. However, it is sufficient that the second starting port is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game is one of 15R 1st jackpot, 12R 2nd jackpot, 7R 4th jackpot, 15R 6th jackpot, and 2R 7th jackpot. If the game ball is passed through the specific area 39 during the special game, the special symbol is in a high probability state, the special symbol is in a short time state, and is in a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy and high base state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, or when the big hit game is executed as a big hit. If the game ball has not passed through the specific area 39, the special symbol will be in the normal state, the special symbol will be in the time-saving state, and the base will be in the high base state.

Further, in the game state after the special game in the case of the 12R 3rd big hit and the 2R 8th big hit, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game. Along with the normal state of the special symbol, the special symbol becomes a time-saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy and high base state". The low accuracy high base state ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display of a special symbol is executed, or when a big hit is won and the big hit game is executed. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39, it will be in a “high accuracy and high base state”.

Further, in the game state after the special game when the 7R 5th big hit is reached, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game, so that the special symbol becomes a normal state and also The special symbol is in a non-time saving state and a low base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". Although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39, it will be in the "high accuracy and high base state".

Further, in the first embodiment, the gaming state becomes the "high probability high base state" due to the occurrence of the 12R second jackpot, and the gaming state becomes the "low probability high base state" due to the occurrence of the 12R third jackpot. In some cases, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating after the end of the special game (big hit game), that is, whether it is a high probability state or a normal state (low probability state). I am trying to be. Such a state in which it is difficult to recognize whether the state is a high probability state or a normal state (low probability state) is called a "probability non-notification state". Similarly, when the gaming state becomes the "high probability high base state" due to the occurrence of the 2R 7th jackpot, and when the gaming state becomes the "low probability high base state" due to the occurrence of the 2R 8th jackpot. , The state after the end of the special game (big hit game) is defined as the "probability non-notification state". In this "probability non-notification state", it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is in the high probability state through the appearance (appearance) of the pachinko game machine 1 such as the production performed according to the progress of the game (substantially). Impossible). This "probability non-notification state" can be generated, for example, until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variation display of the special symbol, which is the end condition of the "low probability high base state", is performed. On the other hand, when the gaming state becomes the "high probability high base state" due to the occurrence of any of the 15R 1st big hit, the 7R 4th big hit, and the 15R 6th big hit, this high probability high base state has a high probability. It becomes clear to the player that it is in a state, and it becomes a so-called "probability changing game state" for the player.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, three gaming states of "low probability low base state", "low probability high base state", and "high probability high base state" can be set as the gaming state. In addition to this, it may be possible to set a high probability state of the special symbol and a non-time saving state and a low base state of the special symbol, that is, a "high probability low base state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B by hitting the right side. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it has become. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether the symbol is correct or not, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) rather than hitting left. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the right gaming area should be fired.

On the other hand, in a low base state (for example, a low probability low base state), it is more advantageous to let the game ball enter the left game area 3A by hitting the left side. In the low base state, the second starting port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the first starting port 20 than to enter the ball into the second starting port 21. Because it is. Therefore, a left-handed strike is performed to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. As a result, a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) can be obtained rather than hitting right. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing direction indicator 47 should be launched to the left game area.

Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 38. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter resets. And so on. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is "general diagram", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" and "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special diagram 2". "The second special drawing" is sometimes called.

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 ms. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), the output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like in each process described below. To do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input processing (S202) performed after the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, first large winning opening sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. The detection signal detected by the 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full detection sensor that detects the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as the lower plate full data.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), the normal symbol operation process (S205), the special symbol operation process (S206), and the specific area sensor detection process (S207), which will be described later. , Start-and-ball input processing (S208), and power failure monitoring processing (S209) are executed. After that, other processing (S210) not deeply related to the present invention is executed to end the interrupt processing (S105). Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 ms). ), Interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). .. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of normal figure hold provided in the RAM) It is determined whether or not the number is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), proceed to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the normal symbol random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquired information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol holding balls in the normal symbol holding storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S305). If the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but if the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the special figure 2 The number of reserved balls (the number of the second special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached four (upper limit number). Whether or not it is determined (S306). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than four (NO in S306), Special figure 2 Add 1 to the number of reserved balls (S307).

Subsequently, the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A) are acquired), and the acquired random number values (acquisition) are acquired. Information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). ). If the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process ends, but if the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of 1st special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of 1st special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached 4 (upper limit number). Whether or not it is determined (S310). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 reaches four (YES in S310), the process ends, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than four (NO in S310), Special figure 1 Add "1" to the number of reserved balls (S311).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the disturbance shown in FIG. 7 (A)). Numerical values are acquired), and the acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the first special figure 1 in the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a.

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 13 after the start port sensor detection process (S204). In the normal figure operation process (S205), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), processing during normal symbol change (S404), and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The operation status of the normal figure is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). This process is finished. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / miss determination process described later is performed (S502). Further, after the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D) is referred to, and if the game state is a time saving state, the normal symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second is selected. To do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed. Further, following the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in the time saving state (YES in S602), among the normal symbol hit judgment tables shown in FIG. 8 (C), the table for the time saving state (the hit judgment value is Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail determination based on "0" to "239"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, when it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is not ON, that is, it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time saving state among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C) ( It is determined whether or not the hit is a hit (S603) by the low-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the hit judgment values "0" and "1"), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be a miss (NO in S605), the stop display is missed. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), a normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
The normal symbol random number shift process (S504) is executed after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503). As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if not, the process ends (NO in S801). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802) and the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the normal symbol at the display result (hit normal symbol or out-of-order normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not (S804), this process is performed. To finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal map hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time saving state is in progress (S902). Then, if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern in the time saving state is an opening pattern in which the opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). As described above, the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening for 0.2 seconds is performed once. Therefore, "1" is set in the second start port opening counter. Then, following the set of the open pattern (S903, S906), the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) to open the second start port 21 has been reached (S1003), and if not (NO in S1003), the process is completed and the process is reached. For example, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined in advance whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has been reached (that is, after the second starting port 21 is opened). Judging (whether or not the opened opening time has passed) (S1005), if not reached (NO in S1005), the process is completed, and if reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing per normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag per normal figure is set (S1010) to end the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the non-time saving state, and is set to "0" in the non-time saving state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the end flag for hitting the normal figure is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed, so that the hit for normal figure The end flag is turned off (S1011), the normal figure hit flag is turned off (S1012), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal figure operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S206) after the normal figure operation process (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 20, the processes related to the special symbol display 41 and the large prize device (the first large prize device 31 and the second large prize device 36) are divided into five stages, and these are divided into five stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage of. Then, when the "special figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "2" (S1101). NO, YES for S1103), processing during special symbol change (S1104), and if the "special symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105), the special symbol is confirmed. The process (S1106) is performed, and if the "special figure operation status" is "4" (NO for all of S1101, S1103, and S1105), the special electric accessory process (S1107) as a jackpot game is performed. The special figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) is “0” (S1201). .. Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the second starting port 21 is not stored, the first start is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1) is “0” (S1206). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20 is not stored, the image is displayed. It is determined whether or not the process of using the display screen 7a of the display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers) is in progress (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process is completed. If not (NO in S1211), the standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, when there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. , The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) are performed in this order. Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second starting port 21 Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memories of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 hit / miss judgment process (S1207) and the special figure 1 variation described later will be described. The pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in the first embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure hold is performed only when the second special figure hold is "0" (when YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). Further, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit that is more profitable for the player than the hit / fail judgment based on the first special figure hold (FIG. 8 (B). )).

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure 2 hit / miss determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest region of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the first one of the second special figure hold). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the oldest stored) stored in the corresponding RAM area) is read out (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not in the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state (the jackpot determination values are "3" and "" in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A)). A hit / fail judgment is made based on 397 ") (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in the high probability state (YES in S1302), the hit / fail judgment is performed based on the big hit determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1304). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

When the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1304) is determined to be "big hit" (YES in S1305), the value (label-TRND-AS) of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type is read out and shown in FIG. 8 (B). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table (S1307), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1308), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1309), and the process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit judgment (S1303, S1304) is not "big hit" (NO in S1305), the off symbol is determined (S1306), and the process is finished. In the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Here, the jackpot judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment) and the jackpot type determination judgment may be referred to as "judgment", respectively, or may be referred to as "judgment" including which jackpot symbol will be obtained by performing the jackpot judgment. Good. In addition, these results may be referred to as "judgment results".

Here, the round display 45 is composed of four LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 7R lamp, a 12R lamp, and a 15R lamp. Then, for example, when the 2R 7th jackpot or the 2R 8th jackpot is reached, the 2R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is such as "2R (7R) (12R) (15R)" (for example, (): lighting, Δ: extinguishing). Further, when the 7R 4th jackpot or the 7R 5th jackpot is reached, the 7R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is as shown in "2R △ 7R △ 12R △ 15R △". Further, when the 12R second big hit or the 12R third big hit is reached, the 12R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is as shown in "2R △ 7R △ 12R △ 15R △". Further, when the 15R first jackpot or the 15R fourth jackpot is reached, the 15R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is as shown in "2R Δ7R Δ12R Δ15R ▲".

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) after the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (whether or not the time saving flag is ON) (S1401). If it is determined in S1401 that it is not in the time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in the non-time saving state, then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402). When it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1402), refer to the non-time saving state jackpot table (the part of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the non-time saving state and jackpot). Fluctuation pattern A variation pattern is selected based on a random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. In this embodiment, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Then, the process proceeds to S1404.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1402), then it is determined whether the number of reserved second special symbols is either "1" or "2" (S1405). Since the number of holdings referred to here is the number of storages including the information for which the fluctuation pattern is determined by this processing, the number of holdingss is set to any value of "1 to 4". Then, when it is determined in S1405 that the number of holds is either "1" or "2" (YES in S1405), the first hold number off table (the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 is in a non-time saving state). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the part that is out of alignment and corresponds to the number of reserved balls "1, 2" (S1406). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1405 that the number of reservations is neither "1" nor "2", that is, either "3" or "4" (NO in S1405), the table for removing the second number of reservations. (A part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, which is in a non-time saving state and is out of time and corresponds to the number of reserved balls "3, 4"), and fluctuates based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1407). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 is selected. Further, the first reserved number out-of-number table is set with a higher possibility of selecting a fluctuation pattern of a relatively long fluctuation time than the second hold number out-of-number table. In addition, the shortest variable time (12000 ms) that can be selected is also set to be longer than that of the table for the second hold number deviation (4000 ms).

Further, when it is determined in S1401 that the time is shortened (YES in S1401), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1408). When it is determined in S1408 that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1408), the variation pattern is referred to in the time-saving state jackpot table (the part of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the time-saving state and jackpot). The variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1409). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P12 to P14 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1408 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1408), then it is determined whether or not the number of holds is "1" (S1410). The number of holdings referred to here is the same as described above, and the number of holdings is set to any value of "1" to "4". When it is determined in S1410 that the number of held balls is "1" (YES in S1410), the table for removing the number of held thirds (the variation pattern table shown in FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to (corresponding part) (S1411). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P15 to P18 is selected. Further, when it is determined in S1410 that the number of holds is not "1", that is, the number of holds is any of "2 to 4" (NO in S1410), the fourth table for removing the number of holds (shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the fluctuation pattern table, which is in a time-saving state, is out of alignment, and corresponds to the number of reserved balls "2-4" (S1411). ). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P19 to P22 is selected. Here, the fluctuation pattern selected in the case of the time saving state and the deviation is more likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern selected in the case of the non-time saving state and the deviation. There is. This is because the digestion speed of the special figure hold is accelerated (the game during the time saving is rapidly advanced) by allowing more fluctuation patterns with a short fluctuation time to be selected in the time saving state.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 23 is performed (S1404), and the processing is completed. In the other processing (S1404), a processing such as setting a fluctuation pattern specification command according to the selected fluctuation pattern in the output buffer of the RAM is performed. Further, the variation pattern designation command set in this process is included in the variation start command described later, and is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is one lower side (for example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

In the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 21, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" and the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206). , Special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), the processes (S1601 to S1609) are performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the special figure 1, in S1601, the lowest area of the first special figure hold storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out and processed.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1712) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. 23 and 24. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the first special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 21, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), the fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S1903), if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (S1904). S1905). When it is determined in S1905 that the probability change counter is "0", the probability change flag is turned off and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and when it is determined that the probability variation counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

Then, in S1907, when it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907) and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the time saving for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is counted. The counter value is subtracted by 1 (S1908), it is determined whether or not the time saving counter value is "0" (S1909), and if it is "0" (YES in S1909), the time saving flag is turned off (S1910). Proceed to the processing of S1911. Further, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol winning / failing determination random number and the big hit type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is completed.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), it is subsequently determined whether or not the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot or 15R sixth jackpot) (S2002). When it is determined in S2002 that the type of jackpot is 15R jackpot (YES in S2002), "15" is set in the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game (S2003), and in S2009 Move to processing.

When it is determined in S2002 that the type of jackpot is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2002), then it is determined whether the type of jackpot is a 12R jackpot (12R second jackpot or 12R third jackpot) (S2004). If it is determined in S2004 that it is a 12R jackpot (YES in S2004), "12" is set in the value of the round counter (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, in S2004, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not a 12R jackpot (NO in S2004), then it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 7R jackpot (7R 4th jackpot or 7R 5th jackpot) (S2006). If it is determined in S2006 that it is a 7R jackpot (YES in S2006), "7" is set in the value of the round counter (S2007), and the process proceeds to S2009. If it is determined in S2006 that it is not a 7R jackpot (NO in S2006), the jackpot type is 2R jackpot (2R 7th jackpot or 2R 8th jackpot), so set "2" to the value of the round counter (S2008). , Move to S2009 processing.

In S2009, a big winning opening opening pattern will be set according to the type of jackpot (S2009), and the process will shift to S2010. Here, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is determined according to the type of big hit (see FIG. 6), and in this embodiment, the big winning opening that opens and closes in a specific round is fixed. Specifically, in any big hit, the second big winning opening 35 is opened and closed in the first and second rounds, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened and closed in the third round (if it is a big hit of three or more rounds). It is supposed to be done. On the other hand, in different big hits, the same second big winning opening 35 is opened and closed in the first round, but the opening / closing pattern (opening pattern) may be different.

That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is defined for each type of big hit. Specifically, in the case of the 15R first jackpot, the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot is set, and the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot is executed during the execution of the 15R first jackpot game. .. Also, if it is a 12R 2nd jackpot, set an opening pattern for 12R 2nd jackpot, if it is a 12R 3rd jackpot, set an opening pattern for 12R 3rd jackpot, and if it is a 7R 4th jackpot, set a 7R 4th. Set the opening pattern for the jackpot, set the opening pattern for the 7R 5th jackpot for the 7R 5th jackpot, set the opening pattern for the 15R 6th jackpot for the 15R 6th jackpot, and set the 2R 7th If it is a big hit, set the opening pattern for the 2R 7th big hit, and if it is the 2R 8th big hit, set the opening pattern for the 2R 8th big hit. Then, the corresponding jackpot opening pattern is executed in each jackpot game.

In S2010, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2010). The opening command is defined according to the type of jackpot, and is provided for each jackpot, such as the opening command for the 15R first jackpot and the opening command for the 12R second jackpot. Then, the set opening command then executes the corresponding opening period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, in the case of the 7R 4th jackpot or the 7R 5th jackpot, a period of 1900 ms is set as the opening period, and in the case of other jackpots, the period of 8000 ms as the opening period. Is set. Then, the main control unit 80 transmits the set opening command to the sub control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and the sub control unit 90 that has received the opening command during the opening period. It is assumed that the corresponding predetermined game production is performed. In S2011, the opening period of the jackpot game is started (S2011), and the special figure operation status is set to "4" (S2012). If it is determined in S2001 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2013), and the process ends.

[Special electric accessory processing (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric accessory processing (S1108), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON (S2101), and when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S2101), the probability change flag is Is turned off (S2102), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103). When it is determined in S2103 that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. If NO is determined in S2101, the process proceeds to S2103 without turning off the probability change flag, and if NO is determined in S2103, the process proceeds to S2105 without turning off the time saving flag. That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In the first embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening processes of the jackpot winning devices (first jackpot winning device 31 and second jackpot winning device 36) have been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game. When it is determined that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), then it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the round (S2106). This is determined based on the big winning opening opening pattern set for each big hit type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the opening period ends and the first opening process of the first round is executed. Further, if it is after the first round has already started, it is determined by whether or not the previous round has ended and the predetermined interval period (2000 ms or 200 ms) has ended. The round is also simply referred to as "R" and also referred to as "round game".

If it is determined by S2106 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2106), the round start command of the corresponding round is set (S2107), and the large winning opening opening process is performed (S2108). As a result, the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined round is started. In S2107, a round start command that can specify the starting round is set, such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. .. The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201. Further, in the large winning opening opening process of S2108, the large winning opening opening pattern determined according to the type of jackpot to be executed is started, and the opening pattern defined in the round to be started is started.

Next, in S2109, whether or not the starting round is the V round (second round), that is, the starting is to open the second big winning opening 35 (also referred to as "V attacker") having the specific area 39 inside. It is determined whether or not the round is a round in which the movable piece 150 is operated (a state in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39) (S2109). In this embodiment, the second round is set to the V round for operating the movable piece 150. Further, a round (V round) in which the second large winning opening 35 having a specific area 39 inside is opened and the movable piece 150 is operated is also referred to as a "specific round" or a "specific round game". The "specific round" or "specific round game" in the jackpot game related to the planned passage jackpot is also called the "first specific round" or "first specific round game", and the "specific round" in the jackpot game related to the V unpassed jackpot "Or" specific round game "is also referred to as" second specific round "or" second specific round game ". Further, a round in which the second large winning opening 35 having a specific area 39 inside is opened and the movable piece 150 is not operated is also called a "non-specific round" or a "non-specific round game" and is scheduled to pass V. The "non-specific round" or "non-specific round game" in the jackpot game related to the jackpot is also called the "first non-specific round" or "first non-specific round game", and the "non-specific round" in the jackpot game related to the V unpassed jackpot The "non-specific round" or "non-specific round game" is also referred to as a "second non-specific round" or "second non-specific round game". Further, a round in which the first large winning opening 30 having no specific area or movable piece inside is opened is also referred to as a "normal round" or a "normal round game".

If it is determined in S2109 that the starting round is not the V round (second round), that is, the first round or the third round or later (NO in S2109), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2109 that the starting round is the V round (YES in S2109), the validity period of the specific region is set based on the predetermined specific region effective pattern (S2110). At the same time, the opening / closing operation of the specific area is started (S2111) based on the predetermined specific area opening / closing operation pattern, and the process is completed.

Here, the specific area effective pattern is as shown in the timing chart of "Handling of passing through the specific area" in the timing chart of FIG. 50, and is switched between valid and invalid at a predetermined timing shown in FIG. 50. Further, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is as shown in the timing chart of the “specific area” in the timing chart of FIG. 50, and the movable piece 150 is operated to open (specific area) at a predetermined timing shown in FIG. It can be switched to (a state in which it can pass through 39) or closed (a state in which it cannot pass through a specific area 39).

The specific area opening / closing operation pattern starts at the start of the V round (at the time of the first opening), ends at the end of the V round, and ends at the timing when the interval period (2000 ms) set after the end of the V round ends. (See FIGS. 50-52). Further, as will be described in detail later, only one pattern is set for the specific area opening / closing operation pattern of this embodiment, starting from a closing period of 80 ms, then setting an opening period of 80 ms, and then using a predetermined pattern. An open period or a closed period is set. Further, although only one pattern is set for the specific area opening / closing operation pattern, the end timing of the specific area opening / closing operation pattern differs depending on the jackpot game (V round to be executed), and as a result, it differs due to the difference in the execution period. It becomes a specific area opening / closing operation pattern. Specifically, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern shown in FIG. 51 and the specific area opening / closing operation pattern shown in FIG. 52 are different.

If it is determined by S2106 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2106), the process proceeds to S2112. Here, as a case where it is determined that it is not the start time of the round, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round, during the execution of the round, during the interval period after the end of the round, and during the closing process of the large winning opening, which will be described later. be able to. In S2112, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing operation is in progress, that is, whether or not the predetermined opening pattern started in S2108 is being executed (during the round) (S2112). When it is determined in S2112 that the large winning opening opening / closing operation is being executed (during a round) (YES in S2112), then it is determined whether or not the round end condition of the running round is satisfied (S2113).

Here, as the round end condition of this embodiment, (1) the round execution time (for example, 29 s) specified for the running round has elapsed (or the opening pattern specified for the running round is ended. (2) In the running round, two conditions are set: that a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) have been entered in the running round. Then, when either of the conditions is satisfied, the round end condition is satisfied based on the condition that is satisfied earlier. If it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition is not satisfied (NO in S2113), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition is satisfied (YES in S2113), the round end command of the corresponding round is set (S2114), and the process proceeds to S2115. In S2114, a round end command that can specify the end round is set, such as "1R end command" for the end of the first round and "2R end command" for the end of the second round. .. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201.

Also, if it is determined in S2112 that the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening is not in progress (NO in S2112), the process shifts to the processing of S2115. In S2115, the large winning opening closing process described later is performed (S2115), and then it is determined whether or not the large winning opening closing process is completed (S2116). Here, in the large winning opening closing process, mainly, the interval period setting process, the input / discharge number match determination process in the chance rounds (1st round and the 2nd round), the retry process when it is determined that there is a mismatch, and the error When the notification process or the like is executed and these processes are completed, it is determined that the large winning opening closing process is completed. Further, the closing processing flag is turned on during the execution of the large winning opening closing process, and when the large winning opening closing process is completed (completed), this closing processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the large winning opening closing process is completed is determined by whether the closing process flag is ON or OFF. Here, each of the interval period setting process, the input / output number matching determination process, the retry process, and the error notification process, which can be executed in the large winning opening closing process, is also individually referred to as "confirmation process", and these processes are used. Is also called confirmation processing as a whole.

If it is determined in S2116 that the large winning opening closing process has not been completed (the closing process flag is ON) (NO in S2116), the process is completed. On the other hand, in S2116, when it is determined that the large winning opening closing process is completed (the closing process flag is OFF) (YES in S2116), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and the value of the round counter is "0". Is determined (S2118). When it is determined in S2118 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2118), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2118), the jackpot ending command is set as the jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2119), and the jackpot ending period is started. Then (S2120), turn on the jackpot end flag (S2121), and finish the process. The value of the round counter becomes "0" when all the rounds in the big hit to be executed are completed.

Here, in the jackpot end process in S2119, the process of setting the ending command is performed, and the set ending command is from a plurality of ending commands, the game state at the time of a jackpot, the jackpot type information, and It is assumed that one of the ending commands is selected and set based on the information (whether the V flag is ON or OFF) that has not passed through the specific area (not passed through the specific area). The ending period to be executed (set) differs depending on which ending command is set. Here, the ending period is after all the opening operations of the big winning openings (1st big winning opening 30 and 2nd big winning opening 35) in the big hit game are completed, and the variable display of the special symbol (directed symbol) is displayed. Is a period set before making the execution possible, and is also called an "end period". During this ending period (end period), the big prize opening is closed. In addition, the opening period is a period set before the first opening operation of the big winning opening in the big hit game is started, and after the variable display of the special symbol (directed symbol) is disabled, and the "start period". Also called. In addition, the effect performed during this "start period" is also referred to as "start effect (opening effect)".

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 65, when the gaming state has no low probability time reduction (low probability low base state), as a result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment, the jackpot types are 15R 1st jackpot and 7R 4th jackpot. Or, if it is the 6th big hit of 15R and the V flag is ON, that is, if the high probability state (high probability and high base state) is reached after the big hit game, the ending period of 17,000 ms (first ending period). ) Is set to execute the ending command. On the other hand, as a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, if the jackpot type is 15R 1st jackpot, 7R 4th jackpot, or 15R 6th jackpot and the V flag is OFF, that is, the time is shortened (low) after the jackpot game. In the case of the high accuracy base state), an ending command for executing the ending period (second ending period) of 8000 ms is set.

This is because, as a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, when the jackpot type is 15R 1st jackpot, 7R 4th jackpot, or 15R 6th jackpot, when passing through a specific area, in the ending period, a high probability state (probability variation mode) after the jackpot game. When the effect (first specific effect) indicating to the player is executed and the specific area has not passed (passes the non-specific area), the process shifts to the time saving state (time saving mode) in the ending period. This is due to the execution of the effect (second specific effect) that indicates (indicates to the player that the state is in the low probability state or does not indicate to the player that the state is in the high probability state). Further, in the present embodiment, the first specific effect indicating to the player that the state shifts to the high probability state is regarded as a relatively long time effect, and the player is shown to shift to the time saving state (high probability state). The second specific effect (which does not show the player) is said to be a relatively short period of time. As described above, in this embodiment, since it is necessary to execute ending periods of different lengths according to the specific area passing result (whether the V flag is ON or OFF) in the V round, the ending period needs to be executed according to the specific area passing result. It is possible to set ending periods of different lengths. As a result, the sub-control unit that has received the ending command can execute the ending effect of different effect modes and effect periods according to the ending period (according to the game state after the big hit game). Here, in the V round (in the big hit game), the information indicating the result of passing through the specific area whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area is also referred to as "specific area information". This specific area information has information indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area in the V round and information indicating that the game ball has not passed the specific area in the V round, and determines the ending period. The ending period determining means (ending period determining means) can determine the ending period based on the specific area information.

In addition, when the game state is a low probability no time reduction (low probability low base state) and the jackpot type is 12R second jackpot or 12R third jackpot, the V flag may be ON or OFF. , It is assumed that an ending command for executing a common ending period (third ending period) of 8000 ms is set. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, when the jackpot types are 12R 2nd jackpot and 12R 3rd jackpot, in either case, the effect mode (effect mode) after the end of the jackpot game is determined as to whether the special symbol is correct or not. This is due to a probability non-notification state (also simply referred to as "non-notification mode") in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability (big hit probability) is high or low. That is, in the ending effect executed during the ending period related to these jackpots, the effect of "indicating entering the non-notification mode" (third specific effect) is performed regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not. It is assumed that the ending period to be set does not change depending on the result of passing through the area. Here, in this embodiment, the second ending period and the third ending period are set to the same length period, but instead, the first ending period and the third ending period are set to the same length period. You may. Here, the non-notification mode may have a high probability or a low probability by not notifying the player of the probability of winning / failing (making it difficult to recognize), that is, there is a possibility of a high probability. It is a production that shows that. Here, the third specific effect executed in the ending period when the jackpot type is the 12R second jackpot and the 12R third jackpot as a result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is also referred to as a "first non-notification mode transition effect". This is different from the sixth specific effect (second non-notification mode transition effect) and the seventh specific effect (third non-notification mode transition effect), which will be described later, in the effect mode and effect period. These are considered to have different possibilities (expectations) of high probability, and the high probability expectation in this embodiment is the second non-notification mode transition effect> the first non-notification mode transition effect> the third non-notification mode. The order is the notification mode transition effect.

In addition, when the game state has no low probability time reduction (low probability low base state), the jackpot type is 7R 5th big hit, and the game state has low probability time reduction (low probability high base state) or high probability time reduction. If there is (high probability and high base state), the common ending period of 5000 ms (fourth ending) regardless of whether the V flag is ON or OFF (whether or not it passes through a specific area). The ending command to execute the period) is set. This is because, in the case of the 7R fifth big hit, the effect mode (effect mode) after the end of the big hit game is set to the "normal mode" which is the initial mode executed after the power is turned on. That is, in the ending effect executed during the ending period related to this jackpot, the effect of "shifting to the normal mode" (fourth specific effect) is performed regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not, and therefore, depending on the result of passing through the specific area. It is supposed that the ending period to be set will not be changed. As a general rule, the "normal mode" is a production mode that shows a low accuracy and low base state, but as a result, even if the "normal mode" is set after the big hit game is completed, the accuracy is low (although unlikely). It may be in the base state. However, since the 7R 5th jackpot is a "big hit scheduled to not pass through the specific area", it is very difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during this jackpot game. Further, the fourth ending period is shorter than the first to third ending periods. Since the low probability low base state is the most unfavorable gaming state among the gaming states set after the big hit game, if a time is provided to notify the transition to such a gaming state for a long time, the player's willingness to play the game. May decline. In particular, when such a result (7R 5th jackpot) is obtained in the high-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy low-base state, the tendency is remarkable because the advantageous state shifts to the disadvantageous state (normal state). Is. For this reason, a short ending period is set and the game proceeds quickly.

In addition, when the game state has a low probability time reduction (low probability high base state) or a high probability high base state (high probability high base state), the ending period (8000 ms, depending on the type of jackpot (result of special symbol winning / failing judgment)) (6000 ms, 3900 ms) is defined (see FIG. 48), and the set ending command (executed ending period) does not change depending on the specific area passage information (ON / OFF of the V flag). Specifically, in the case of the 15R 6th jackpot in the high base state, the ending period of 8000 ms is performed in order to perform the effect of "indicating that the high probability state (probability variation mode) continues" (fifth specific effect) in the ending period. It is set to (fifth ending period). It should be noted that the reason why it is not set to 17,000 ms is that the big hit in the high base state is the big hit from the second time onward (in the so-called consecutive villa), so that the game progress in the consecutive villa is quick, so it is appropriate (than the first hit) The time is set (shorter). Further, in the high base state, when the 2R 7th jackpot is reached, the effect mode after the jackpot game is completed is set to the “non-notification mode”. Then, in the ending period, the ending period of 6000 ms is performed in order to perform the effect of "indicating the entry into the non-notification mode" (sixth specific effect, second non-notification mode transition effect) regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not. (6th ending period) is set. Further, in the high base state, when the 2R 8th big hit is reached, the effect mode after the big hit game is completed is set to the "non-notification mode". Then, in the ending period, the ending period of 3900 ms is performed in order to perform the effect of "indicating the entry into the non-notification mode" (7th specific effect, 3rd non-notification mode transition effect) regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not. (7th ending period) is set.

Since the 2R 7th jackpot is a "V-passing scheduled jackpot", the gaming state after the jackpot game is considered to be a high probability state as long as the game is played in the normal manner (as instructed), and the 2R Since the eighth big hit is a "big hit scheduled to not pass V", the game state after the big hit game is set to a time saving state. Therefore, during the ending period, the player plays the game with a higher probability in the case where the second non-notification mode transition effect is executed than in the case where the third non-notification mode transition effect is executed. It becomes possible. Further, in the high base state, when any of the 15R 1st jackpot, the 12R 2nd jackpot, the 12R 3rd jackpot, or the 7R 4th jackpot is obtained, the case where the 15R 6th jackpot is achieved in the high base state described above. Since the same ending period is set, the description will be omitted. Further, in the case of the 2R 7th jackpot in the low probability no time reduction (low probability low base state), the ending period is set to the same as in the case of the 2R 7th jackpot in the high base state described above. Is omitted. Further, in the case of the 2R 8th jackpot in the low probability no time reduction (low probability low base state), the ending period is set to the same as in the case of the 2R 8th jackpot in the high base state described above. Is omitted. Further, the 2R 8th jackpot is defined as "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" (also referred to as "V non-passing scheduled jackpot"), and the high probability state is supposed to end with this jackpot as an opportunity. Therefore, as described above, it is preferable that the period for notifying the entry into such a disadvantageous period is a short period, so that the shortest period (3900 ms) is set. In addition, the following reasons can be cited as one of the reasons why the ending period is not changed based on the specific area information during the time reduction. That is, since the big hit during the time reduction is the second and subsequent big hits (so-called consecutive villas), the player becomes accustomed to the game, and the game proceeds as scheduled for "V passing big hit" or "V not passing big hit". Since the possibility is very high, the ending period should not be changed based on the specific area information.

Further, in S2105, when it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2105), since the final round in the jackpot game has ended, it is determined whether or not the execution time of the jackpot ending effect has elapsed (S2105). S2122), if it is determined that the ending time has not passed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2123), and the game state setting process (S2124) described later is performed. Next, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

Here, in the specific area validity period setting process (S2110), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is effective for the V round, that is, the predetermined period after the opening of the second large winning opening 35 in the second round is started (S2110). Set to the period (also referred to as "valid period" or "first period") for determining (privilege grant). The period other than the valid period is set as a period (also referred to as an "invalid period" or a "second period") in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid (privilege non-granting). Further, the validity period of the specific area 39 includes the execution mode of the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round and the opening pattern of the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker). It is determined based on the execution mode of the opening / closing operation pattern of the movable piece).

Specifically, the period during which the passage of the specific area is valid, that is, the period during which the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high probability state (the period during which the privilege is given) when the game ball passes through the specific area , As shown in FIGS. 51 to 52. FIG. 51 is a timing chart of the second round of the 2R 8th big hit, the 7R 5th big hit, and the 12R 3rd big hit, that is, the V round (the 2nd big winning opening 35 is opened). The 2R 8th jackpot, 7R 5th jackpot, and 12R 3rd jackpot are defined as "V unpassed jackpots" in which the game ball is not scheduled to pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the V round (opening pattern of the V attacker), the opening pattern of the short opening with a short opening time (second opening pattern) is selected.

Along with this, the specific area opening / closing pattern is executed, and the specific area validity period setting process is executed. First, when the V attacker opens, the V round (second round) is started, and the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is started. As shown in FIG. 51, the specific region opening / closing operation pattern starts from the closed state. After 80 ms in the closed state, it changes to the open state (the movable piece 150 operates and changes from (a) to (b) in FIG. 47), and after 80 ms in the open state (after 160 ms in total). In addition, it changes to a closed state. On the other hand, in this short opening opening pattern, the V attacker is closed only by opening 100 ms, and the V round (second round) is completed. Then, an interval period of 2000 ms is set. The specific area opening / closing operation pattern is supposed to end at the end of the V-round interval period (2000 ms). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, after the opening of 80 ms is completed, the closed state of 1940 ms is passed, and then the specific region opening / closing operation pattern is terminated. As a result, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is terminated without executing the subsequent opening operation of up to 26000 ms (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, the valid period of the specific area is after the start of the V round, and is started at the timing when the specific area is first opened. That is, 80 ms in the closed state after the start of the V round and before the specific area is opened (before the movable piece starts operating) is regarded as an invalid period. After that, during the execution of the specific area opening / closing operation pattern, the period during which the specific area is opened is set to the valid period. However, it is considered as an invalid period during the retry operation. In addition to this, when the specific area is switched from the open state to the closed state, the period of 900 ms after the closed state (this period is also referred to as “extra period”) is maintained as the valid period. This is because when the movable piece 150 is closed, the ball enters the specific area 39 just before the specific area 39 is closed, and the game ball that has entered is actually detected by the specific area sensor 39a. This is because it may be after the area is closed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when switching from the open state to the closed state, it is effective for a certain period of time after the closed state, regardless of whether the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is being executed or after the end. It is a period. In FIG. 51, after the valid period (extra period) of 900 ms has elapsed, since there is no period in which the specific area is open (excluding the execution period of the retry operation), the invalid period is also set thereafter.

Next, using FIG. 52, the second round of the 15R first jackpot, the 12R second jackpot, the 7R fourth jackpot, the 15R sixth jackpot, and the 2R seventh jackpot, that is, the V round (second jackpot 35). The specific area validity period setting process will be described using the timing chart of (open). The 15R 1st jackpot, 12R 2nd jackpot, 7R 4th jackpot, 15R 6th jackpot, and 2R 7th jackpot are "V passages" in which the game ball is scheduled to pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. It is said to be a "planned jackpot". Therefore, as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the V round (opening pattern of the V attacker), the long opening opening pattern (first opening pattern) having a long opening time is selected.

Along with this, the specific area opening / closing pattern is executed, and the specific area validity period setting process is executed. Similar to the above, when the V attacker (second prize opening 35) is opened, the V round (second round) is started and the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is started. Unlike the short opening, the opening pattern of the long opening in FIG. 52 opens the V attacker for 16000 ms to close the state, but the opening pattern continues after that by repeating opening and closing. Then, all the open patterns of long opening set in the V round (second round) such as the above-mentioned 15R first jackpot are executed, or the regulation defined in the V round (second round) in the V round. The V round (2 rounds) is considered to end when a number of game balls (10 balls in this embodiment) enter or when any of the end conditions is satisfied. On the other hand, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is 2 unless a specified number of game balls enter during 840 ms (that is, 1000 ms after the start of the big hit game) after the lapse of the first open state (80 ms). The second open state (maximum 26000 ms) is executed. Since the rate of fire of the game balls is about 1 ball per 600 ms, it is practically impossible to insert 10 game balls in 1000 ms.

As a result, in the specific area valid period setting process, after the initial open state (80 ms) of the specific area 39 is completed, the extra period is maintained as the 900 ms valid period, and then the invalid state is set. Then, after 1940 ms of the invalid state, the specific area 39 is set to the valid period in accordance with the second open state. Then, as shown in FIG. 52, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is assumed to end when the V round ends and the interval period (2000 ms) related to the V round ends. Since the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is closed at the same time as the end, in the specific area valid period setting process, an extra period of 900 ms is set as the valid period after the closed state is reached, and then the invalid period is switched. ..

Here, at the timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON (that is, the timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the valid period), the game status indicator 46 is displayed in a predetermined manner. As an aspect, it is notified that the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high probability state. Specifically, the game status indicator 46 is composed of three LEDs of "a1a2a3". Then, in the first embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). Further, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode is "a1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■". Then, when the big hit game is completed and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □". Further, the lighting control timing of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the big hit game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area, the display mode of "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" remains. , "A1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■" may be displayed at the timing of transition to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, and "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" may be displayed at the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. ..

That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36) described later, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned on outside the V valid period (V invalid). The V flag is not turned on when the V passage is detected (during the period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (game state setting process (FIG. 35) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the passage of V by fraudulent activity, that is, it is prevented from being illegally set to the high probability state.

[Large winning opening closing process]
Next, the large winning opening closing process (also referred to as “confirmation process”) will be described with reference to FIG. 33. The big prize opening closing process (S2115) is a process performed at the end of each round in the special electric accessory processing (big hit game). In the large winning opening closing process (S2115), first, it is determined whether the closing processing flag is ON (S2701), and if it is determined that the closing processing flag is not ON (NO in S2701), the closing processing flag is turned ON (S2702). , Start the interval period (S2703) and move to the processing of S2704. As a result, the closing processing flag indicating that the closing processing is being executed is turned on, and the measurement of the interval period (2000 ms or 200 ms) set after the round is started. The interval period is set according to the round to end.

Specifically, when the ending round is the first round or the second round, 2000 ms is set as the interval period, and when the ending round is the third round or later, 200 ms is set as the interval period. Further, when the closing process of the large winning opening is completed, the closing process flag is turned off. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing processing flag is ON in S2701, that is, the large winning opening closing processing is being executed (YES in S2701), the processing proceeds to S2704 as it is.

In S2704, it is determined whether or not the interval period has ended (S2704), and if it is determined that the interval period has not ended, that is, the interval period is being measured (NO in S2704), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval period has ended (YES in S2704), then it is determined whether or not the end is the first round (S2705). If it is determined that the first round has been completed (YES in S2705), the input / discharge number matching determination process described later is executed (S2708), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2705 that the end is not the first round (NO in S2705), then it is determined whether the end is the second round, that is, the V round (S2706). When it is determined in S2706 that the end is the second round (YES in S2706), the specific area opening / closing operation is ended (S2707), and the process proceeds to S2708.

As a result, the opening / closing operation of the specific area 39 (opening / closing operation of the movable piece 150) in the V round is completed. That is, the specific area opening / closing operation that is started at the start of the V round is assumed to end with the end of the interval period related to the V round after the end of the V round. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2706 that the end is not the second round, that is, the end is the third and subsequent rounds (NO in S2706), the closure processing flag is turned off (S2709), and the processing is performed. Finish. That is, from the third round onward, as long as the interval period (200 ms) set after the end of the round ends, the closing processing flag is turned off and the winning opening closing processing is completed. That is, in the large winning opening closing process after the third round, the input / discharge number matching determination process and the specific area opening / closing operation end process are not executed.

In S2708, whether or not the number of game balls that entered the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) during the round and the number of the entered game balls that were ejected from the big winning opening match. The input / discharge number match determination process to be determined is performed (S2708), and the process is completed. In addition, this input / output number matching determination process (S2708) is a round executed before the V round, and is a round (non-specific round) in which the same V attacker (second major winning opening 35) as the V round is opened. ) Is the first round and the second round is the V round (specific round), and in the subsequent rounds (third and subsequent rounds), even if the V attacker is released. But it is not done. In the V round, since the movable piece for opening and closing the specific area 39 in the V attacker is operated, the game ball may be caught in the movable piece and the game ball may be clogged in the attacker. Therefore, the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged are managed to check if there is any clogging. In addition, when a specific area is passed by a fraudulent act such as a so-called fishing line goto, the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match, so that fraudulent activity is detected and unexpected damage is prevented from occurring. It is also possible.

Further, the input / discharge number matching determination process is executed in the first round in order to confirm whether or not there is a ball jam before the execution of the first V round executed in the jackpot game. If the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged match at the end of this one round, it is possible to start the second round V round with the confirmation that there is no ball clogging. If the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match at the end of one round, a retry process (also referred to as "movable member operation process") or error notification, which will be described later, is performed before the start of the V round. It is also possible to eliminate ball clogging. In this way, it is possible to normally execute the V round by performing the input / discharge number matching determination process in the first round and the second round. In addition, in the rounds after the last V round executed in the jackpot game, that is, in the third and subsequent rounds (after the end of the V round), the input / discharge number matching determination process is not performed, and the interval period Is set to a short period (200 ms), and the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

[In / out number matching judgment processing]
Next, the input / discharge number matching determination process (S2708) will be described with reference to FIG. 34. In the input / discharge number match determination process (S2708), first, in a predetermined round, the number of game balls (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls ejected (number of balls entered) into the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) (number of balls entered) It is determined whether or not the number of emissions) matches (S2801). This input / output number match determination process (also referred to as “match determination process”) is performed only in the first and second rounds of the large winning opening closing process. Then, in both the first round and the second round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening pattern. Therefore, during the corresponding round (1st round or 2nd round), the number of balls entered into the 2nd big winning opening 35 and the number discharged from the 2nd big winning opening 35 (2nd big winning device 36) are It determines whether or not they match.

FIG. 47 is a schematic view showing the second special winning device 36. All the game balls that have entered the second prize opening 35 pass through the predetermined game ball guidance passage in the second prize device, and all of them pass through the second prize opening sensor 35a (“ball entry detection means” or “ball entry detection means”. It passes through the detection sensor). That is, the second large winning opening sensor 35a is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening 35, and the second large winning opening sensor 35a is based on the detection by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. It is possible to count the number of balls entering the mouth 35. When the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the number of balls entered is counted and stored by the number of balls entered counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80.

Further, the game ball detected (passed by) by the second large winning opening sensor 35a then passes through a predetermined game ball guidance passage, and is sure to be either the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area detection sensor 49a. Pass through. That is, the specific area sensor 39a (also referred to as "second emission detection means" or "second emission detection sensor") and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a (also referred to as "first emission detection means" or "first emission detection sensor"). Is a sensor for detecting the discharge of the game ball from the second special winning opening 35, and is discharged from the second special winning opening 35 based on the detection of the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a. It becomes possible to count the number. When the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area detection sensor 49a, the discharge number is counted and stored by the discharge number counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Further, the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a that detect that the game ball that has entered the second prize opening is discharged are also collectively referred to as "emission detection means" or "emission detection sensor".

In this embodiment, the number of incoming balls and the number of ejected balls are provided, and the number of incoming balls and the number of ejected balls are separately counted, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It is also possible to provide a means for counting the number of incoming / outgoing balls and increase / decrease the counted value each time there is an incoming / outgoing ball. In such an embodiment, the initial value is set to "0", and when the count value is "1", it means that the number of balls entered is one more than the number of ejected balls, and when it is "-1", the number of ejected balls is one. It indicates that the number is one more than the number, and in the case of "0", it is possible to assume that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match.

Further, a movable piece 150 (also referred to as a "movable member") is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and when the movable piece 150 is in the closed state, the second large winning opening sensor 35a is used. The passing game ball is guided to the non-specific area side, passes through the non-specific area sensor 49a, and is discharged to the outside of the second special winning device (see FIG. 47 (a)). On the other hand, when the movable piece 150 is in the open state, the game ball that has passed through the second large winning opening sensor 35a is guided to the specific area side, passes through the specific area sensor 39a, and goes out of the second large winning device. It will be discharged (see FIG. 47 (b)).

Then, in S2801, the counting value of the above-mentioned number of balls entering and counting means is compared with the counting value of the number of dischargings counting means, and whether or not the counting values match is determined by the number of balls entering and the number of ejected balls during the round. Is to be determined if they match. Next, when it is determined in S2802 that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match (YES in S2802), it is determined whether or not error notification is being executed (S2803). If it is determined by S2803 that error notification is not being executed (NO in S2803), the closure processing flag is turned off (S2804), and the processing ends. That is, if the numbers of inputs and discharges match and the error notification is not being executed, the processing for closing the large winning opening of the corresponding round is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the error notification is being executed (YES in S2803), the error notification is terminated (S2805), the closure processing flag is turned OFF (S2804), and the processing is completed. This is because the match determination is performed again during the execution of the error notification (S2809) described later, and if it is determined that there is a match, the closing processing flag is turned off after the running error notification is terminated halfway. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the error notification from being unnecessarily continued for a long period of time even though the abnormality has been resolved.

When it is determined in S2802 that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match (NO in S2802), then it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the retry operation (S2806). In this embodiment, as shown in the reference timing chart of the V round shown in FIG. 50, the matching determination of the input / discharge numbers is performed from t1 (2100 ms from the start of the round) to t2 (29000 ms from the start of the round) according to the end timing of the V round. It will be executed at any timing in the range of. Then, if it is determined that there is no match in the match determination, a retry operation of 300 ms is executed after 1500 ms has elapsed from the execution timing of the match determination. Then, after the retry operation is completed and 900 ms has elapsed, an error notification of 10000 ms is executed, then the error notification is terminated, and the large winning opening closing process is completed (completed), and the process proceeds to the next round.

When it is determined in S2806 that it is not the execution time (start time) of the retry operation (NO in S2806), then it is determined whether or not it is the execution time (start time) of the error notification (S2808). When S2808 determines that it is not the time to execute error notification (NO in S2808), it determines whether it is the end time of error notification (S2810). If it is determined by S2810 that it is not the end time of error notification (NO in S2810), the process ends as it is. For example, if this is the period before the start of the retry operation (the period of 900 ms + 600 ms) after the above-mentioned discrepancy is determined, when the input / output number match determination process is executed again, the input / output number is again executed. If it is determined that there is a match, the process proceeds to S2803, and if it is determined that there is no match again, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the retry operation again. The same applies hereinafter.

In this way, since the input / output number matching determination process is repeatedly executed in a predetermined interrupt cycle, the first input / output number matching determination is executed at the end of the interval period of the chance round (1 round and 2 rounds). In the period until the retry operation is executed, the input / output number matching determination is executed a plurality of times including the first determination. Then, if it is determined to match in the second and subsequent input / discharge number matching determinations, the subsequent processing (retry operation and error notification) is not executed, the closing processing flag is turned off, and the processing is completed. Further, the end of the interval period coincides with the end of the specific area open / close pattern, and if the state at the end of the specific area open / close pattern is the open state, the specific area open / close pattern is ended. An extra period of 900 ms is provided after the closed state.

As described above, the extra period is treated as valid for passing through the specific area 39. That is, since this extra period may be set after the first input / discharge number matching determination (for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 52), it is determined that the first input / discharge number matching determination is a mismatch. If the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the extra period, it will be determined as a mismatch in the input / discharge number matching determination even though the game is originally normal. Even in such a case, in this embodiment, since it is possible to execute the input / discharge number matching determination a plurality of times before the retry operation is executed, the input / discharge number matching determination after the second time before the retry operation is executed is matched. It is possible to end the large winning opening closing process without performing a retry operation or error notification. Further, in the present embodiment, since the input / discharge number matching determination is executed a plurality of times even during the extra period of 900 ms, it is more reliable when the game ball passes through the specific area or the non-specific area during the extra period. It is possible to quickly end the large winning opening closing process without performing unnecessary processing (retry operation or error notification).

Further, in this embodiment, due to the interrupt cycle, the input / output number matching determination is executed even after the end of the extra period and before the start of the retry operation (600 ms), so that the detection is performed during the extra period. It is possible to reliably execute the input / output number matching determination process before performing the retry operation or error notification in a state in which the game ball is reliably reflected. In addition, if it is determined that there is a mismatch in the input / discharge number matching determination during this extra period and the subsequent 600 ms period, there is a possibility that ball clogging or the like has occurred, so the movable pieces are arranged in a predetermined pattern. Execute the retry operation to operate. It is preferable that the retry operation pattern is different from the specific area opening / closing operation pattern. In this embodiment, due to the interrupt cycle, it is possible to execute the input / output number matching determination a plurality of times even during the period (900 ms) after the end of the retry operation and before the execution of the error notification. When the ball clogging or the like is cleared, it is determined that the numbers match by the input / discharge number matching determination before the error notification, and the large winning opening closing process can be completed without performing the error notification. In addition, since it is possible to execute the input / discharge number matching judgment multiple times even during the execution of the error notification, it is possible to end the error notification at the timing when it is determined to match and complete the large winning opening closing process. Become. As a result, it is possible to provide game control that does not give the player anxiety without executing unnecessary error processing. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent the game entertainment from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, if it is not determined to match in the input / discharge number matching determination even after the error notification execution period has elapsed, the end of the predetermined error notification period (10000 ms in this embodiment) is reached. The closing process of the winning opening has been completed, and it is possible to move to the next round. The game store side can confirm the game machine and take some measures during the 10000 ms error notification so that the normal game can be continued. In addition, there is no ball clogging, etc., and due to the generation of noise, etc., it may be determined that there is a mismatch in the input / discharge number matching judgment. In such a case, the game is not stopped unnecessarily and the time elapses. This makes it possible to clear the error and resume the game quickly.

When it is determined in S2806 that it is the execution time (start time) of the retry operation (YES in S2806), the retry operation is executed (S2807) and the process ends. If the S2808 determines that it is time to execute the error notification (YES in the S2808), the error notification is executed (S2809), and the process ends. If it is determined that it is the end time of the error notification (YES in S2810), the error notification is ended (S2811), the closing processing flag is turned off (S2812), and the processing is completed. By turning off this closing processing flag, it is possible to indicate that the large winning opening closing processing has been completed.

[Game status setting process]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag to be turned ON in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36) described later. When it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2202), "10000" is set in the probability change counter (S2203), and the V flag is turned OFF (S2204). , Turn on the time saving flag (S2205), set "10000" to the time saving counter (S2206), and finish the process. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to set the gaming state after the big hit game to the high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is ON in this gaming state setting process. ing.

Here, when the V flag is ON, the number of times the probability variation counter is set is the number of times that the special symbol hit / miss determination can be executed with a high probability. Considering the jackpot probability in a high probability state, the daily business hours of the amusement store, and the number of special symbol winning / failing judgments that can be executed during the business hours, the value of "10000" times is substantially the next jackpot. It is the same as guaranteeing a high probability state until it occurs or until the end of business hours. Therefore, when the V flag is turned ON and the high probability state is set, it can be said that the high probability state is guaranteed until the next big hit occurs (substantially synonymous). Further, when the probability change flag is ON, the time reduction counter is similarly set to "10000" times, so that the time reduction state (open extension state) is also set while this high probability state is set. It can be said. As in this embodiment, the probability variation counter and the time reduction counter may be set to a value of "10000" times to substantially set the high accuracy and high base state until the next time, or the V flag is ON. In the case of, a control that sets a high accuracy and high base state until the next big hit actually occurs may be adopted without setting a value in the counter.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not the end is the 7R 5th jackpot without turning on the probability variation flag (S2207). In S2207, it is not the 7R 5th jackpot that ended, that is, the other jackpots shown in FIG. 6 (15R 1st jackpot, 12R 2nd jackpot, 12R 3rd jackpot, 7R 4th jackpot, 15R 6th jackpot, 2Rth If it is determined that it is either a 7 jackpot or a 2R 8th jackpot (NO in S2207), the time reduction flag is turned ON (S2208), the time reduction counter is set to "100" (S2209), and the process is completed. .. As a result, the gaming state after the big hit game this time becomes a low probability state, a short time state, and a high base state (that is, a low probability high base state). This low-accuracy high-base state ends when either of the conditions that the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times (the special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed 100 times) and the next big hit occurs. To do. Further, the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter count the total number of times the fluctuation display number of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol are added. In this way, even if it is a "V-passing planned jackpot" such as the 15R first jackpot, if there is no passage in a specific area during the V-round due to some reason such as no game ball being launched, the probability is high. It will be in a time saving state (low probability high base state) without being set.

Further, when it is determined in S2207 that the end is the 7R 5th big hit (YES in S2207), the process is completed without turning on the probability change flag and without turning on the time saving flag. That is, in the case of the 7R fifth big hit, when the V flag is OFF (the specific area has not passed (also referred to as "specific area non-passing")), the gaming state after the big hit game has a low probability state and It is set to the low base state (low probability low base state).

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the specific area sensor detection process (S207) after the special figure operation process (S206). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). When it is determined in S2401 that there is no detection by the specific area sensor 39a (NO in S2401), the process ends. When it is determined in S2401 that there is detection by the specific area sensor 39a (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not the specific area is valid (S2402). The specific area valid period is a period set in the specific area valid period setting process (S2110) in the above-mentioned special electric accessory process (FIG. 32). The specific area validity period is set to the second round (V round) in the jackpot game.

In addition, when it is determined in S2402 that the specific area (specific area sensor) is in the valid period (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and the specific area passage command is set (S2404). Finish the process. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this specific area passage command to the sub control board 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and the sub control board 90 receives the specific area passage command based on the received specific area passage command. A predetermined game effect is executed in the display area or the like.

If the S2402 determines that the specific area (specific area sensor) is not in the valid period (invalid period) (NO in S2402), the invalid period passing command is set without turning on the V flag (NO in S2402). S2405), finish the process. When a specific area is passed during the invalid period, a predetermined error may be displayed on a display or the like that can be controlled by the main control unit. Further, the CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this invalid period passing command to the sub control board 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and the sub control board 90 receives the invalid period passing command based on the received invalid period passing command. A predetermined error notification may be performed by using the image display device 7, the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the speaker 67, or the like.

[Processing at the time of starting ball]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start / entry time process (S208) after the specific area sensor detection process (S207). As shown in FIG. 37, in the start ball entry process (S208), first, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out. (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (S2502). If it is determined in S2502 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S2502), the process proceeds to S2503. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S2502), the process proceeds to S2506. The S2503 reads out the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit (acquisition information). S2503). Next, the S2504 determines the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol (S2504). Specifically, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) acquired at the time of entering the starting port depends on the current gaming state (whether the low probability state or the high probability state). To determine whether it is a big hit or a miss. If the determination result (preliminary determination result) is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined. This is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold") in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) regarding the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / miss judgment (S1303, S1309) in the special figure 2 hit / miss judgment process (S1202) described later. It is equivalent to "look-ahead").

The pre-judgment is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a jackpot determination table for a high-probability state if it is a high-probability state, and a normal state if it is a normal state (low-probability state). Based on the jackpot determination table, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value. Further, as another pre-judgment mode, as a fluctuation pattern information judgment table capable of judging fluctuation pattern information, a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the jackpot is executed.

Next, in S2505, game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the second special symbol read by S2501 and the information pre-determined by S2504 (pre-judgment information) is generated as the special figure 2 start ball entry command. , Set in the output buffer for command transmission to the sub control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2505). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S2503 may be transmitted to the sub control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information) may be transmitted.

In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 with the sub control unit 90, whether or not the information is related to a big hit, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is several, and the big hit type. The sub-control unit 90 can identify any of the above. Further, in the first embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as a hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, among the acquired random number values read by S2503, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (big hit). Command data including information indicating a random number value for type determination), a value of a fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), and information indicating a result of pre-judgment is generated and set as a special figure 2 start entry command. It is possible.

Next, in S2506, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-described processing according to Special Figure 2 (S2506). When it is determined in S2506 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S2506), the process proceeds to S2507. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2506 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S2506), the process ends as it is.

In S2507, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2507), and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in the high base state (YES in S2507), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2507 that the time saving flag is OFF, that is, in a low base state (NO in S2507), the process proceeds to the process related to the preliminary determination after S2508. Here, when the time saving flag is ON, that is, when the current gaming state is the high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is operating, and whether or not the special figure 2 is correct or not. The determination (see FIG. 8B) is easy to perform. Further, in the first embodiment, as will be described later, the digestion of the special figure 2 hold (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold (variation display of the first special symbol). (So-called special figure 2 priority variable machine). In such a configuration, for example, when the preliminary determination of the special figure 1 is performed, the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a notice, and the result of the preliminary determination is clearly shown to be a big hit, the player By using the priority of special figure 2 hold digestion, the special figure 2 hold is intentionally eliminated (set to "0") at any timing, and the big hit related to special figure 1 showing the result of the preliminary judgment is intended. Technical intervention such as generating is possible. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of fairness of the game that the player can adjust the timing of occurrence of such a big hit. Therefore, when the current gaming state is not a low base state but a high base state (YES in S2507), this process is terminated without performing the process related to the preliminary determination of Special Figure 1 after S2508.

The processing of S2508 to S2510 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S2508). The acquired random number value read out is pre-determined (S2509), and the game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the first special symbol read out by S2501 and the information pre-determined by S2509 (pre-judgment information) is obtained. Special figure 1 Generated as a start-in ball command, and set in an output buffer for sending a command to the sub-control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2510). The pre-determination (holding look-ahead) of S2509 is performed prior to the pass / fail determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 pass / fail determination process (S1207) described later.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S209) after the hold ball number process (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is a power off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the game machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is a hit game, the number of reserved balls is some, the number of remaining fluctuations of the probability change / time reduction is some. Etc.) are stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub control board 90 reads and executes the sub control main processing program shown in FIG. 39 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. .. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, the CPU initialization process is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (at the time of turning on the power), and are not executed after that.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In addition, the random number for determining the effect includes a random number for determining the advance effect that determines the advance effect and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding the random numbers one by one at the time of updating, it may be added by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. Execute the production (directed design game production, special game production related to the jackpot game, etc.). The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, and operation of the movable decorative member are performed. It is possible to perform control, audio output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), as shown in FIG. 40, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is sent to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. Determine if it has been entered (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a 2 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). .. Subsequently, a lamp data output process for outputting the lamp data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later is performed (S4202). Next, a drive data output process for outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) is performed (S4203). This drive data is also created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the receive command analysis process (S4301) and the specific effect start process (S4302), which will be described later, are performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process (S4303) is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition process A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 43, in the reception command analysis process (S4301), it is first determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4395), and it is determined that the start entry command has not been received. If (NO in S4395), the process shifts to S4401 processing, and if it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4395), the effect hold information storage process (S4400) is performed and the process shifts to S4401 processing. .. The effect hold information storage process (S4400) is a random operation for determining the jackpot type (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start-in ball command (special figure 1 start-in ball command or special figure 2 start-in ball command) received in S4395. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation patterns random values) according to the type of special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , The shift memory format is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the number of reserved balls "4" in special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

In S4401, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4401), the variation effect start processing (S4402) described later is performed. If it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4401), the process shifts to the S4406 process without performing the variation effect start process. In S4406, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4406), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4406), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to display the variation effect. The variable effect end process to be terminated is performed (S4407). In the variation effect end process (S4407), the variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 changes and displays the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is stopped and displayed to end the variable effect (effect pattern game effect). On the other hand, when it is determined in S4406 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4406), the process shifts to the processing of S4408 without performing the fluctuation production end processing. The variable effect refers to various effects performed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, in S4408, when it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4408) and when it is determined that the opening command has been received (YES in S4408), in the case of a special game (big hit game). The special game effect selection process for selecting the pattern (effect mode) of the special game effect to be executed is performed (S4409). The special game production includes at least the opening production that is executed during the opening period before the opening of the big prize opening (before the start of the first round) accompanying the start of the special game, and the round game (big prize) during the special game (during the big hit game). It includes a round effect (big hit game effect) that is executed according to the progress of the mouth-entry ball game. In the first embodiment, an opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted from the main control board 80, and the length of the opening period (opening time) is specified by the opening command. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, when the types of jackpots are 7R 4th jackpot and 7R 5th jackpot, the opening time is 1900 ms (1.9 seconds), and the other jackpots are 8000 ms (8 seconds). It has become. The reason why the opening time of the 7R 4th jackpot and the 7R 5th jackpot is shorter than the other jackpots is that in the case of the 7R 4th jackpot and the 7R 5th jackpot, the "VS chance production" described later is performed. This is because the "VS chance production" does not clearly notify the player of the occurrence of the jackpot, and makes it difficult for the player to recognize the start timing (start of the first round) of the jackpot game. Then, in the special game effect selection process (S4409), the effect pattern of the selected special game effect (opening effect, round effect, etc.) and the information based on the received opening command (opening command type, opening time, start timing) are present. A special game start command that can specify the jackpot type related to the jackpot game) is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When the set special game start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays the special game effect according to the progress of the jackpot game. Is executed on the display screen 7a of.

Here, more specifically, when the type of jackpot is 15R first jackpot, 12R second jackpot, or 12R third jackpot in the low probability time reduction state, the set opening time (8000 ms) is used. Then, an effect (start effect) indicating that the jackpot game is about to start is executed so that the player can easily recognize it, and then a predetermined round effect (big hit game effect) is performed with the start of the first round in the jackpot game. To start. As this start effect, for example, characters such as "Congratulations", "Big hit", and "Probability change big hit" are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the big hit game is started from now on (a large number of prize balls). An aspect of displaying an image that impresses (the start of a game that can acquire the above) can be mentioned. On the other hand, when the types of jackpots are 7R 4th jackpot and 7R 5th jackpot, the opening time is 1900 ms (1.9 seconds), and in this opening time, the start of the jackpot game is easily recognized by the player. No special production (starting production as described above) is performed.

As a result, it is easy to recognize that the effect executed during the opening period of 8000 ms such as the 15R 1st jackpot starts the jackpot game as compared with the effect executed during the opening period of 19000 ms such as the 7R 5th jackpot. It is said to be a possible production. In addition, after the start effect executed using the opening period of 8000 ms such as the 15R first jackpot is completed, a round effect different from this start effect is started again, so that the jackpot game also starts from this point. It is easy to recognize that. Here, at least the production performed during the jackpot game may be referred to as a "special production". For example, the round effect that starts after the end of the start effect of the 15R first jackpot may be referred to as the "first special effect".

Further, in the case of the 7R 4th jackpot and the 7R 5th jackpot, the start effect is not executed so that the player can easily recognize that the jackpot game is started during the opening period, but the "VS chance" described later is performed. It is supposed to perform "directing". Since this "VS chance production" does not directly notify the start of the jackpot game, the player starts the jackpot game as compared with the start production of the 15R first jackpot and the first special production. It is said that it is difficult to recognize. Further, this "VS chance effect" can be started from the middle of execution of the variable display of the identification information related to the 7R 4th jackpot or the 7R 5th jackpot. In addition, since it is executed as a series of effects from the middle of the variable display of the identification information to the end of the big hit game (until the end of the big hit game), depending on the player, it seems as if the variable display of the identification information continues. You may receive it. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the start of the jackpot game. For example, the "VS chance production" that starts from the middle of the variable display of the identification information of the 7R 5th jackpot and is continuously executed during the opening period (1.9S) and the jackpot game may be referred to as the "second special production". .. Further, the "VS chance production" executed at the time of the 7R 4th big hit may be referred to as the "3rd special production".

In particular, when the game state is a state with a low probability of no time reduction (normal state), when the 7R 5th jackpot is reached, the amount of profit (number of prize balls) that can be obtained is larger than that of other jackpots (15R jackpot, 12R jackpot). In addition to being small, the game state after the jackpot game ends is a state with no low probability time reduction (normal state). In addition, since it is said to be a "big hit scheduled to not pass through a specific area", it will not be in a high probability state. On the other hand, in the case of another big hit (15R big hit, 12R big hit, etc.), the game state after the big hit game is a high probability high base state (high probability state) or a low probability high base state (time saving state). Is set to. That is, as a jackpot (related to the special symbol 1) that normally occurs without a low probability of time reduction, the 7R fifth jackpot can be said to be the jackpot with the lowest profit as compared with other jackpots. If the jackpot type is 7R 5th jackpot when the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment is a jackpot, the player is not a little discouraged, and in the worst case, the motivation to play may be diminished. Even more so, if the jackpot finally obtained after playing for a long time is the 7R 5th jackpot, the possibility becomes more remarkable.

Therefore, as described above, by making it difficult for the player to understand the start of the big hit game related to the 7R 5th big hit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation for the game and to maintain and improve the game interest. In addition, a player who does not notice the start of the jackpot game related to the 7R 5th jackpot is in a special gaming state in which a predetermined amount of game profit (prize ball) can be obtained even though the jackpot game has not started. You may think that it was. In such a case, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game even though the jackpot game with low profit is executed. Also, regarding the big hit game related to the 7R 4th big hit, the game state after the big hit game is considered to be a high accuracy and high base state, but the amount of profit earned is small compared to other big hits, so this is also a big hit game. It is possible to exert a certain effect by making it difficult to recognize the start of. In addition, since the game state after the execution of the second special effect related to the 7R 5th big hit (after the end of the big hit game) is the low probability low base state (normal state), the special symbol is correct or not in this second special effect. It is also possible to execute an effect that is common to the effect that is executed when the result of the determination is out of order. As a result, it is possible to further increase the possibility that the player will receive the impression that the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner during the execution of the second special effect. In addition, since the game state after the execution of the third special effect related to the 7R 4th big hit (after the end of the big hit game) is a high probability high base state (high probability state), a special symbol is used in this third special effect. It is also possible to execute an effect that is common to the effect that is executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit.

Here, the "common effect" includes an effect in which some of the effects are different and some of the effects are the same, or exactly the same effect, among the effects executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. .. In addition, "partially the same effect" includes an effect using the character image of the same character and an effect using the same image data (the difference only in the display size is included in the same effect). .. "Partially different effects" means, for example, that the character image executed in the effect is the same but the background display mode and color are different, or the character image is the same but the symbol (effect symbol) is displayed. It is possible to list different aspects.

Next, when it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4410) and it is determined that the ending command has been received (YES in S4410), the pattern or special of the special game end effect (ending effect) The ending effect selection process (S4411) for selecting the type of effect mode after the game is completed, and the process for S4412 (FIG. 44) are performed. In the first embodiment, an ending command is transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the type of jackpot and whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game (second round). , The ending command specifies the length of the ending period (ending time). For example, as shown in FIG. 48, as a result of the special symbol hit / fail determination in the low probability low base state, the ending time when the jackpot type is 15R 1st jackpot and 15R 6th jackpot is the game ball to the specific area 39. If there is a passage, it will be 17,000 ms (17 seconds), and if there is no passage of the game ball to the specific area 39, it will be 8000 ms (8 seconds). The details of the difference in the ending times of the 15R 1st jackpot and the 15R 6th jackpot will be described later.

Further, in the first embodiment, the ending time when the types of jackpots are the 12R second jackpot and the 12R third jackpot as a result of the special symbol hit / fail determination in the low probability / low base state is set to the game ball to the specific area 39. The same 8000 ms (8 seconds) is set depending on whether or not there is a passage, and the content of the ending effect (ending effect pattern) to be executed is the same. In this way, the ending time and ending effect are the same regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39, because the "probability non-notification state (non-probability non-notification state)" is obtained after the jackpot game related to the 12R second jackpot and the 12R third jackpot is completed. This is because the notification mode) ”is generated. That is, as described above, for the 12R second jackpot and the 12R third jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined based on the opening mode (opening pattern) of the jackpot during the jackpot game, the effect related to the jackpot, and the like. Has become difficult for players. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game related to the 12R second big hit and the 12R third big hit is "high probability high base state" or "low probability high base state", but it is a high base state for the player. This is a "probability non-notification state" in which it is difficult to recognize whether the state is a high probability state although it can be recognized. In order to improve the playability and the game interest in this "probability non-notification state", the ending time and the ending effect are the same. The same applies to the 2R 7th jackpot and the 2R 8th jackpot.

Then, in the ending effect selection process (S4411), the effect pattern of the selected ending effect, the information based on the received ending command (type of ending command, ending time, type of jackpot related to the finished jackpot game, after the jackpot game is completed). A special game end command that can specify (such as the effect mode of) is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When the set command at the end of the special game is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays an effect related to the end of the big hit game on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Run on. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received by S4408 (NO in S4408), the process shifts to the processing of S4410 without performing the special game effect selection process, and it is determined that the ending command has not been received by S4410. In the case (NO in S4410), the process proceeds to the process of S4412 (FIG. 44) without performing the ending effect selection process.

In S4412, it is determined whether or not a specific area passage command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4412), and if it is determined that a specific area passage command has been received (YES in S4412), the specific area is within the specific area validity period. When the V-passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed to 39 (V-passing) is turned ON (S4413), the process proceeds to S4414, and it is determined that the specific area passing command has not been received (S4412). NO), the process shifts to S4414 processing without turning on the V passage flag. When the V-pass flag is turned ON in S4413, a V-pass designation command for notifying that there is a V-pass is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When this set V passage designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 is involved in the running big hit game of the 15R first big hit or the 15R 6th big hit. In the case of a jackpot game (15R jackpot game), a V-passage notification effect for notifying that a V-passage has occurred is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Examples of the V-passage notification effect include displaying a character image of "V" on the display screen 7a and outputting a sound effect indicating V-passage. On the other hand, the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game other than the 15R jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game related to the 12R second jackpot or the 12R third jackpot (12R jackpot game), or a 7R fourth jackpot or a 7R fifth jackpot. In the case of the jackpot game (7R jackpot game) or the jackpot game related to the 2R 7th jackpot or the 2R 8th jackpot (2R jackpot game), the above-mentioned V passage notification effect is not executed. As described above, after the end of the 12R jackpot game and after the end of the 2R jackpot game, the "probability non-notification state" is set, so even if there is a V passage, that fact is not notified. Further, in the case of the 7R jackpot game, since the production corresponding to V passage or V non-pass is performed in the "VS chance production" described later, even if there is V passage, at this point (when the V passage designation command is received). It is decided not to notify that fact. However, in order to ensure the fairness of the game, the V passage notification effect may be performed even in the case of the 12R jackpot, the 7R jackpot, and the 2R jackpot. In this case, the V-passage notification effect is preferably performed in a mode that is harder to recognize than the normal effect, in order not to impair the playability in the probability non-notification state and the effect of the VS chance effect. Specifically, characters, figures, symbols, etc. indicating the occurrence of V passage are displayed small in the corner of the display screen 7a, or are included in an LED display (for example, an effect display 102, etc.) different from the image display device 7. It can be exemplified that the LED is turned on or blinked.

Subsequently, in S4414, it is determined whether or not the round start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4414), and if it is determined that the round start command has not been received (NO in S4414), the process proceeds to S4421. , If it is determined that the round start command has been received (YES in S4414), the round specification command corresponding to the received round start command is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4415), and the processing of S4416 is performed. Transition. The round start command transmitted from the main control board 80 includes information capable of specifying the number of rounds to be started (start round), and the effect control microcomputer 91 has received the information. The number of rounds of the start round is specified based on the round start command, and a round specification command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer. When the round designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 outputs a round effect according to the number of rounds specified based on the round designation command of the image display device 7. Execute on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, in S4416, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds specified based on the round start command received in S4114, that is, the number of rounds in the start round is 3R (S4416), and if it is not 3R (NO in S4416), If the process shifts to the processing of S4421 and if it is 3R (YES in S4416), it is determined whether or not the V passage flag is ON (S4417). When it is determined that the V passage flag is ON (YES in S4417), the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the second round during the jackpot game, that is, in the V round (also referred to as a specific round or a specific entry game). (V-pass), so set the V-pass effect specification command instructing the execution of the effect display corresponding to the pass in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4418), and set the V-pass flag. Is turned off (S4419), and the process proceeds to S4421. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4417 that the V passage flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in S4417), it means that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 39 in the V round (V has not passed). Therefore, the V non-passing effect designation command instructing the execution of the effect display corresponding to the non-passing is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4420), and the process proceeds to S4421. When the V-passing effect designation command or the V-non-passing effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 determines the predetermined time after the third round of the jackpot game this time. In addition, an effect corresponding to V-passage or V-non-passage is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, when the big hit game being executed is a 7R big hit game, an effect corresponding to V passing or V non-passing is performed in the "VS chance effect" described later. Further, in the case of the 15R jackpot game, a round effect corresponding to V passage or a round effect corresponding to V non-pass is performed as the round effect of the third and subsequent rounds. In the case of the 15R jackpot game, since the V notification effect has already been executed at the timing when the V pass flag is turned on as described above, the effect corresponding to V pass or V non-pass is not particularly performed in the third and subsequent rounds. May be good. Further, in the case of the 12R jackpot game and the 2R jackpot game, as described above, after the jackpot game ends, the "probability non-notification state" occurs, so that at least before the jackpot game ends and the jackpot game ends. In the predetermined period after the end, in principle, the effect corresponding to the passage of V or the non-passage of V is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Finally, other processing is performed on S4421 to complete this processing. As other processing performed by S4421, processing based on a reception command other than the above-mentioned command (for example, a normal symbol fluctuation start command, a normal symbol fluctuation stop command, etc.) is performed.

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4402) performed based on the reception of the variation start command in the reception command analysis process (S4301) will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the variation effect start process (S4402), first, in S4501, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses a random number for determining the variation effect, a random number for determining the advance notice effect, a random number for determining the effect symbol, a random number for determining the specific effect, and the like. Performs effect determination random number processing (S4501) to acquire various effect determination random numbers. In the first embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired values, the mode of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, the advance notice effect, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, in S4502, the fluctuation start command is analyzed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the information for designating the fluctuation pattern includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P22) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. The judgment result of the above, the symbol information for specifying the jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. It should be noted that these fluctuation pattern information, game state information, symbol information, and the like can also be used in processing other than the variation production start processing to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E.

Here, the effect mode is a mode of effect in the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect mode of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect is different. Specifically, the images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as different characters, items, and background images, and the effect symbol game effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. Further, when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects may be executed depending on the effect mode. In the first embodiment, the effect mode A (mode status "1") is executed when the low accuracy low base state is controlled, and the effect mode B (mode status "2") is the low accuracy high base state (time reduction). It is executed when it is controlled to the game state), and the effect mode C (mode status "3") is executed when it is controlled to the high probability high base state (probability change game state). Therefore, the player can grasp the current gaming state by confirming which of the production modes A to C.

Further, in the effect mode D (mode status "4") or the effect mode E (mode status "5"), a jackpot game related to the 12R second jackpot, the 12R third jackpot, the 2R seventh jackpot, and the 2R eighth jackpot is performed. It is executed when the control is performed in the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state after the damage, and in the "probability non-notification state". Therefore, when the effect mode is D or E, even if the player confirms the effect mode, he / she can grasp whether the probability state of the special symbol winning / failing determination is in the high probability state or the low probability state (normal state). It's difficult to do. In that sense, the effect modes D and E can be said to be probability non-notification modes.

Next, in S4504, a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern) performed by using the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. is set (S4504). .. Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode. The variable effect pattern determination table is set. In the first embodiment, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. Therefore, in the S4504, among the variable effect pattern determination tables. , The table corresponding to the mode status (current production mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Has been done. In S4504, one of the plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables is set.

Subsequently, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variation effect acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern matching the specified variation pattern is selected and set (S4505). .. As the variable effect pattern, a variable mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) and when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or the character It is determined that the production is not executed (reach no production design game production). In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). When the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the symbols constituting the big hit mode, and the remaining one. Refers to an effect indicating whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol that completes the jackpot mode while the variable display is continued. Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as "stop effect symbol") to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). Production symbol The production symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game production is doublet with an odd number such as "777" when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is 15R jackpot, and "666" or the like when the result is 12R jackpot. It is considered to be doublet with an even number of symbols. In addition, one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" is different from the other production symbols when there is a reach, and "635" etc. when there is no reach. At least one of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is selected so that the other effect symbols are different. Further, in the first embodiment, even when the 2R jackpot and the 7R jackpot are hit, the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the same mode (separate stitches) as when the hit is off. However, for the 2R jackpot and the 7R jackpot, a predetermined chance eye such as "135" or a dedicated symbol such as "3 ★ 3" may be stopped and displayed. The above-mentioned stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 is an example, and when a big hit occurs, what is stopped and displayed as the stop effect symbol can be appropriately changed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, as the variation mode (variation effect pattern) of the effect symbol 8, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, Super reach C, character production, etc. are set, and in S4505, which of these productions is performed based on the fluctuation production pattern determination table, or these effects are not performed (this is also referred to as "normal fluctuation"). It is decided. Then, when the reach effect symbol game effect is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination table. Here, when the super reach effect is executed as the effect symbol game effect, it is set so that the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case where the normal reach effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the super reach production is a game production having a higher reliability of big hit (possibility of becoming a big hit) than the reach (normal reach) production. The reach effect can be mainly set (executed) when a variation pattern designation command for specifying a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) having a variation time of 30,000 ms or more is received. Further, in the first embodiment, as a kind of super reach (SP reach), a confrontation reach production in which a friendly character (hereinafter referred to as “friendly character”) and an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as “enemy character”) decide the victory or defeat (hereinafter referred to as “enemy character”). The third production) is provided, and when the ally character wins in the confrontation reach production, the big hit is confirmed. There are four types of confrontation reach production patterns, confrontation reach A to D, and the enemy characters (opponents) are different for each confrontation reach. Such a confrontation reach effect can be set (executed) when a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 9) with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms or more is received.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern specified based on the fluctuation pattern information included in the received fluctuation start command (fluctuation pattern designation command) is any of the jackpot fluctuation patterns P1 to P3. When the jackpot type specified based on the symbol information included in the command is 7R jackpot (7R 4th jackpot, 7R 5th jackpot), "VS chance" is started from a predetermined time during the execution of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect). "Direction" is to be started. This "VS chance production" is performed until the 7R jackpot game is completed, and is not only a variable production but also a special game production. Details of "VS chance production" will be described later.

In S4505, a variation effect pattern corresponding to any of various variation effects including these “reach effect” and “VS chance effect” is set in response to the processing results of S4501 to S4504 (S4505). Then, in the subsequent S4506, a variable effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect, etc. based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4506), and the variable effect is produced. End the start process. When the variation effect start command set in S4506 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Specific production start processing]
Next, the specific effect start process (S4302) performed by the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described. The specific effect means the above-mentioned "VS chance effect". As shown in FIG. 46, in the specific effect start process (S4302), it is first determined whether or not the variable effect (effect symbol game effect) is being executed (S4601), and if not (NO in S4601). If the process is completed and executed as it is (YES in S4601), the process shifts to the process of S4602, and the variable effect being executed is the variable effect related to "7R jackpot (7R 4th jackpot, 7R 5th jackpot)". It is determined whether or not (S4602). Then, when the variable effect being executed is not the variable effect related to "7R jackpot" (NO in S4602), it is either "off", "15R jackpot", "12R jackpot" or "2R jackpot". If it is such a variable effect (NO in S4602), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the variable effect being executed is a variable effect related to "7R jackpot" (YES in S4602), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the specific effect (VS chance effect) (S4603). In the first embodiment, the start timing of the specific effect (VS chance effect) is set to the timing when the remaining execution time (remaining variation time of the special symbol) of the variation effect related to the "7R jackpot" is 3 seconds. The remaining execution time of the variation effect is, for example, started to operate with the set of the variation effect start command by S4506 described above, so that the variation effect is substantially synchronized with the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol on the main control board 80 side. It is possible to specify by a timer (a time measuring means composed of a program of the effect control microcomputer 91) capable of measuring the execution time of the above.

If the S4603 determines that it is not the time to start the specific effect (VS chance effect) (NO in S4603), or if it is determined that it is the time to finish the process and start it (YES in S4603), the specific effect (VS chance) The production pattern (specific production pattern) of the production) is selected from a plurality of predetermined production patterns, and the selected specific production pattern is set (S4604). In S4604, a random number lottery based on a random number for determining a specific effect is performed, and one of a plurality of specific effect patterns is selected. The random number lottery here is performed using the random number for determining the specific effect included in the random number for determining the effect acquired in S4501. Then, the specific effect start command for starting the specific effect (VS chance effect) based on the effect pattern set in S4604 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4605), and the specific effect start process is completed. To do. When the specific effect start command set in S4605 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 causes the specific effect pattern specified based on the specific effect start command. That is, the predetermined image data corresponding to the specific effect pattern set in S4605 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the "VS chance effect" based on the read image data is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Execute.

Here, as described above, the "VS chance production" as the specific production is started at the timing of the remaining 3 seconds of the fluctuation production related to the 7R jackpot, and then is performed until the 7R jackpot game is completed. There is. Further, a plurality of specific effect patterns to be selected in the processing of S4604 are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and specifically, four types of specific effect patterns are stored. As the production pattern (specific production pattern) of the "VS chance production" of the first embodiment, a confrontation scene (confrontation image) similar to the four confrontation reach (confrontation reach A to D) in the confrontation reach production described above is displayed. It has four specific effect patterns (confrontation A to confrontation D), and in S4604, any one of these four specific effect patterns is selected and set, and a confrontation scene based on the set specific effect pattern. (Any of confrontation A to confrontation D) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the execution of the 7R jackpot game. In the ROM (image ROM) of the image control board 100, image data corresponding to the four confrontation reach in the confrontation reach effect is stored in advance, and the image data is used when executing the confrontation reach effect. However, since the same confrontation scene (confrontation image) is displayed in the VS chance production, the image data is also used when the VS chance production is executed. In this way, by diverting the image data used in the reach effect (variation effect) to the VS chance effect (variation effect and special game effect), it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the image ROM. In addition, by performing the same confrontation scene production (second production) as the confrontation reach production (third production) as a variable production as a special game production (round production) during the 7R jackpot game, the 7R jackpot game is in progress. It is possible to give the player the impression that the variable production (confrontation reach production) is being performed despite the existence.

When a specific effect (VS chance effect) is started by the processing of S4302, and then an opening command, ending command, round start command, etc. are received by the received command analysis process (S4301) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) (S4408, S4410). , S4414), the process related to the execution of the effect display based on the reception of these commands is performed as the process related to the execution (progress) of the specific effect (VS chance effect) based on the specific effect pattern set in the process of S4604 described above. Further, when the V passage effect designation command (S4418) or the V non-passage effect designation command (S4420) is transmitted to the image control board 100 after the start of the specific effect (VS chance effect), the CPU of the image control board 100 causes the CPU of the image control board 100 to move. A process is performed in which the end of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect) in the specific effect (VS chance effect) being executed is displayed in correspondence with V passing or V non-passing. That is, the specific effect pattern set in the processing of S4604 includes information indicating which of confrontation A to confrontation D corresponds (confrontation type information), but includes information indicating the confrontation result (win / loss). There is no such thing. Then, in the first embodiment, the image data for displaying the "end of the confrontation scene corresponding to the passage of V" and the "end of the confrontation scene corresponding to the non-passage of V" for each of the confrontation A to the confrontation D is an image. It is stored in advance in the ROM (image ROM) of the control board 100. Therefore, when the CPU of the image control board 100 displays the ending of the confrontation scene, the image data for displaying the ending corresponding to the confrontation scene being executed is used as the received V-passing effect designation command or the V-non-passing effect designation command. By reading out based on this and performing an effect display using the image data, the ending of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect) is displayed in a mode corresponding to V passing or V non-passing. As for the image data displaying the end of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect), the image data used to indicate the end (big hit or miss) of the confrontation reach effect (variable effect) may be diverted.

The above is the main processing of the effect control in the first embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, of the "V passing planned jackpot" and the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" having the same number of rounds. In the "7R 4th jackpot" and the "7R 5th jackpot", a specific effect ("VS chance effect" in this example) is performed as described above. This "VS chance production" and the 2nd big winning opening 35 from the 1st to 2nd rounds of the above-mentioned "7R 4th big hit (V passing big hit)" and "7R 5th big hit (V not passing big hit)" By linking with the characteristic opening pattern (opening and closing operation), it is more difficult to distinguish (discriminate) between "7R 4th big hit" and "7R 5th big hit", and the game state after the big hit game is a high probability state. It is possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) whether or not it becomes. The "VS chance production" will be described in detail below.

[VS chance production]
53 and 54 show a series of display modes from the start (generation) to the end of the VS chance effect executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The VS chance effect (specific effect) of the first embodiment is mainly shown in the "introduction effect (introduction scene)" shown in FIGS. 53 (b) to 53 (d) and FIGS. 53 (e) to 53 (f). It is composed of three effects (effect scenes): the "selection effect (selection scene)" shown and the "confrontation effect (confrontation scene)" shown in FIGS. 54 (g) to (h1) and (h2). As described above, the first embodiment has four specific effect patterns, and the content of the “confrontation effect (confrontation scene)” is different for each specific effect pattern (confrontation A to D). Then, as will be described in detail later, the selection effect includes an effect (selection effect 2 described later) indicating which of the confrontations A to D has been selected (selection result). For this reason, at least four production modes (effect patterns) are provided for each of the "selection production" and the "confrontation production".

First, FIG. 53A shows the display screen 7a in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out of reach of “5”, “6”, and “5”, respectively, in the process of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect). It shows the state where the temporary stop is displayed in the center. The temporary stop display means that the variable display of the special symbol has not been completed and the special symbol has not been stopped and displayed, that is, the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment has not yet been definitively displayed (confirmed display). Means that. Therefore, in the temporary stop display, each effect symbol 8 is shown in a state of being slightly moving on the display screen 7a to the extent that the type (number, etc.) of the displayed effect symbol can be recognized. Also called fluctuation). When a girl character image appears from this state as shown in FIG. 53 (b), three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (effect symbol display area 7b) are displayed small in the upper left of the display screen 7a. (Reduced display), and the variable display is restarted at that position with the small size (Introduction effect 1). The "girl character appearance" and "reduced display of the effect symbol 8" by the introduction effect 1 shown in FIG. 53 (b) are performed based on the determination in the above-mentioned S4603 that it is the start timing of the specific effect. In the first embodiment, the timing at which the remaining time until the end of the symbol fluctuation (the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol) becomes about 3 seconds is set as the start timing of the specific effect.

Then, when about 3 seconds have passed from the start of the display of the introduction effect 1 shown in FIG. 53 (b), the characters "VS chance" are displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 53 (c), and the VS chance effect is produced. The occurrence (start) of is notified to the player (introduction effect 2). At this time, the sub-control board 90 receives the fluctuation stop command from the main control board 80 (S4406), and the image control board 100 receives the fluctuation effect end command transmitted by the sub-control board 90 based on the command (S4406). As a result, when the introduction effect 2 is executed, the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been variablely displayed in a small size on the upper left of the display screen 7a, have the same mode as in the case of being off (separate eyes: here). The stop display (confirmed display) is displayed at "325"). Here, the finalized display of the effect symbol 8 shown in FIG. 53 (c) is performed in an extremely short time, and when the confirmed display time elapses, the effect symbol 8 is erased from the display screen 7a (non-). The display mode of the display screen 7a shifts to the mode (introduction effect 3) shown in FIG. 53 (d). Therefore, the symbol confirmation effect (fourth effect) related to the stop display (confirmation display) of the effect symbol 8 performed when the introduction effect 2 (FIG. 53 (c)) is executed is performed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize. It will be. In the first embodiment, the final display time of the effect symbol 8 in the introduction effect 2 is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Further, the effect display related to the "introduction effect (first effect)" shown in FIGS. 53 (b) to 53 (d), that is, the effect of mainly displaying the character image of the girl from the introduction effect 1 to the introduction effect 3 (first effect). ) Is an effect displayed both during the execution of the variation effect shown in FIG. 53 (b) (during the symbol variation) and during the execution of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 53 (d). In other words, it is both a variable production and a special game production.

The state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the introduction effect 2 of FIG. 53 (c) is performed is a state in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the 7R jackpot symbol, and at this time, the 7R jackpot from the main control board 80 is displayed. The sub-control board 90 receives the opening command related to the above (S4408), and the image control board 100 receives the special game start command from the sub-control board 90 based on the opening command. As a result, the introduction effect 3 of FIG. 53 (d) is executed on the display screen 7a of the painting priest display device 7. Here, the opening period (1900 ms) of the 7R jackpot is shorter than the opening period (8000 ms) of other jackpots, and in the opening period of the 7R jackpot, the so-called opening indicating the occurrence of a jackpot or the start of a jackpot game, etc. The effect image (girl character image) displayed in the introduction effect 2 is continuously displayed in the introduction effect 3 without performing the effect. That is, the background images of the introduction effects 2 and 3 are the same. In this way, "the opening period should be shortened and the background image should not be changed without performing the opening effect", and the above-mentioned "short-time confirmation display of the effect symbol 8 (in this example, the final display of the disjointed eyes) and the effect symbol 8". Due to the synergistic effect of "erasing", it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the timing (the start timing of the big hit game) when the first opening of the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) is started.

As shown in FIG. 53 (d), in the introduction effect 3, a message prompting the player to enter the game ball into the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker) (characters "Please aim at the attacker") and the player On the other hand, a launch navigation image 8n indicating the launch position of the player is displayed. After that, until the third round of the 7R jackpot game is started, that is, until the second round of the 7R jackpot game is completed and the interval period (2 seconds) is completed, the display mode of the display screen 7a is shown in FIG. The introduction effect 3 of 53 (d) changes to the selection effects 1 and 2 of FIGS. 53 (e) and 53 (f). In the selection effect 1 of FIG. 53 (e), an effect of selecting in a roulette format which of the “confrontation A to D” the confrontation to be executed in this VS chance effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “roulette effect”) is performed. In the selected effect 2 of FIG. 53 (f), the result of the roulette effect is displayed together with the enemy character image 8b. This selection result corresponds to the specific effect pattern selected and set in S4604 in the above-mentioned specific effect start process (S4302). Such a change from the selection effect 1 to the selection effect 2 occurs at the timing when about 60,000 ms (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the second V attacker release (16000 ms release shown in FIG. 49) after the start of the 7R jackpot game. Will be done. Then, the selection effect 2 (display of the result of the roulette effect) is performed until the third round of the 7R jackpot game is started. With such a selection effect, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the confrontation scene (confrontation effect) that will be started after that, enhance the effect of the VS chance effect, and improve the game entertainment during the big hit game. It is possible to plan. In addition, since the jackpot game is in progress in the selection effect 1 and later in FIG. 53 (e), the launch navigation image 8n (here, the characters “right-handed” and “right direction” are shown) instructing the player to hit right. The symbol) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The confrontation A to D (confrontation effect pattern) to be selected in the roulette effect is an effect in which the confrontation scene is configured in the same manner as the confrontation reach A to D in the confrontation reach effect described above.

Here, until the third round of the 7R jackpot game is started, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in any case of "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R 5th jackpot", FIG. 53 (b) ) To (f), that is, the introduction effects 1 to 3 and the selection effects 1 and 2 are performed, and the 1st and 2nd rounds (V round) of the "7R 4th jackpot" The effect display mode is the same as in the first round of "7R 5th jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 49, in the 1st and 2nd rounds (V round) of the "7R 4th jackpot" and the 1st round of the "7R 5th jackpot", the 2nd big winning opening 35 (V attacker) The mode of opening and closing operation is the same. For this reason, for the player, at least either "7R 4th jackpot" or "7R 5th jackpot" occurs from the end of the variable effect related to the 7R jackpot to the start of the third round of the 7R jackpot game. It is extremely difficult to recognize (discriminate) whether or not it has been done. As a result, at least from the start of the 7R jackpot game (the first V-attacker opening start shown in FIG. 49, the introduction effect 3 of FIG. 53 (d)) to the end of the round game after the second V-attacker opening ( From the start of the interval after the second V attacker opening shown in FIG. 49 to the selection effect 2 in FIG. 53 (f)), that is, the 1st and 2nd rounds (V round) of "7R 4th jackpot" and " Each round of "7R 5th jackpot" can be recognized by the player as one "chance round" in which the V attacker enters the game ball and aims to pass the game ball to the specific area 39. .. In this sense, through one chance round (1 round + 2 rounds), it is determined whether or not the game state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high probability state based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 39. It can also be regarded as a "decision game".

Then, when the second opening of the V attacker (opening of 16000 ms) is performed after the start of the 7R jackpot game, in the case of "7R fourth jackpot", the previous first opening is performed as one round. , At the time of the second opening of the V attacker, it means that it has advanced to the second round (V round). During this opening, the movable piece 150 in the V attacker is in the operating state (specific area opening), so that the V attacker is opened for the second and subsequent times in the "7R 4th jackpot" (2nd to 7th times shown in the upper part of FIG. 49). By letting the V-attacker enter the game ball (at the time of opening), at least one of the entered game balls will pass through the specific area 39 with a high probability (see FIG. 47 (b)). On the other hand, in the case of "7R 5th jackpot", as in the case of "7R 4th jackpot", although the previous first opening has been completed, it is still in the 1st round (it has not progressed to the 2nd round). Therefore, when the V attacker is opened for the second time or later in the round (when the V attacker is opened for the second to seventh times shown in the lower part of FIG. 49), the movable piece 150 is not in the operating state (specific area is closed), and the game is played at the time of this opening. Even if the ball is entered into the V attacker, the entered game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 (see FIG. 47 (a)). As described above, in the first embodiment, the difficulty (difficulty) of discriminating the 7R jackpot type is increased from both the opening / closing operation mode and the effect display mode of the V attacker (second big winning opening 35). In particular, in order to open the second V attacker of the "7R 4th jackpot" as 2 rounds (V round) at the same progress as the 2nd V attacker opening of the "7R 5th jackpot", the "7R 4th jackpot" By completing the first round of V-attacker opening in a short time (opening of 100ms), the apparent identity with the first V-attacker opening of "7R 5th jackpot" is ensured (Fig. 49). See). This makes it possible for the player to recognize a "chance round" having a difference in V passage possibility as one "chance round" in which it is difficult to detect the difference. From this, the first round in which the first V attacker release (opening of 100 ms) of the "7R 4th jackpot" is performed is, so to speak, a dummy round (pseudo round, non-specific round, non-specific entry game). It can be said that.

Then, in the 7R 4th jackpot, when the interval period first reached after the second opening of the V attacker ends, the process proceeds to the 3rd round, and in the 7R 5th jackpot, the interval period first reached after the second opening of the V attacker. When the process is completed, the process proceeds to the second round (V round), and after the V attacker is released for a short time (100 ms) in the round, the process proceeds to the third round (see FIG. 49). With the start of the third round, the display mode of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a confrontation based on the confrontation content (confrontation effect pattern) shown in the selection effect 2 from the selection effect 2 of FIG. 53 (f). It changes to the confrontation effect of FIG. 54 (g) that displays the scene, and the ally character image 8a is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this way, when the "chance round" ends and the third round starts, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes significantly. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the V attacker short opening (momentary opening and closing) before the start of the third round in the "7R 5th jackpot", that is, the existence of the V attacker short opening in the second round. .. Since the V attacker opening time in the 2 rounds (V round) of the 7R 5th jackpot is 100 ms (0.1 seconds), it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will enter the V attacker, and the game ball will The possibility of passing through the specific area 39 is extremely low.

When the confrontation effect shown in FIG. 54 (g) is displayed with the start of the third round, the sub control board 90 receives the third round start command from the main control board 80 (S4414, S4415), and is based on this. The image control board 100 receives the V-passing effect designation command (S4418) or the V-non-passing effect designation command (S4420) from the sub-control board 90. Then, after the third round, a confrontation scene (confrontation production) between the ally character image 8a and the enemy character image 8b is developed on the display screen 7a according to the progress of the round, and the confrontation is completed by the end of the 7th round of the 7R jackpot game. The ending of is displayed. The ending of the confrontation scene differs depending on whether the image control board 100 receives the V passing effect designation command or the V non-passing effect designation command, and the result of the previous chance round depends on the ending of the confrontation scene. Will be shown. That is, if the V-passing effect designation command is received, it is determined that the game ball has passed the specific area 39 in the previous chance round and the jackpot game is completed, so that the display screen 7a The display mode of is the ally character victory effect shown in FIG. 54 (h1). On the other hand, if the V non-passing effect designation command is received, the game ball has not passed through the specific area 39 in the previous chance round, and the high probability state does not occur (becomes a normal state) after the big hit game ends. Since it is confirmed, the display mode of the display screen 7a is the defeat effect of the ally character shown in FIG. 54 (h2). From this, it can be said that the effect (confrontation effect) related to the confrontation scene shown in FIGS. 54 (g), (h1), and (h2) is the "result notification effect" indicating the result of the previous chance round. In a broad sense, the "result notification effect" can be regarded as referring to the "confrontation effect as a whole", and in a narrow sense, it can be regarded as referring to the "ally character victory effect" and the "ally character defeat effect". Then, when the ally character victory effect shown in FIG. 54 (h1) is executed, it is highly possible that the 7R jackpot this time is the "7R fourth jackpot", and the ally character defeat effect shown in FIG. 54 (h2) is executed. In that case, it is highly possible that the 7R jackpot this time is the "7R fifth jackpot".

It should be noted that the confrontation effect (second effect) performed from (g) to (h1) or (h2) in FIG. 54, that is, from the 3rd round to the 7th round of the 7R jackpot game (straddling a plurality of round games). The confrontation effect (second effect) is the same as the confrontation reach effect (one aspect of SP reach) performed as a variable effect. And, for each confrontation production (second production) of confrontation A to D, a ally character victory production which is a V passing mode and a ally character defeating production which is a V non-passing mode are provided, respectively. , As the production mode developed from the start to the end (end display) of the confrontation production (confrontation scene), a production mode that leads to victory of the ally character and a production mode that leads to the defeat of the V ally character are provided for each confrontation production. There is. In addition, the VS chance production (specific production) is designed in consideration of the entry of a specified number of game balls into the V attacker and the progress of the round game (round digestion) based on the specified opening time of the V attacker. Therefore, in the introduction effects 1 to 3 and the selection effects 1 and 2 (see FIGS. 53 (b) to (f)) performed before the start of the third round, the game balls are appropriately launched. As long as it is, it will proceed according to the entry status of the game ball to the V attacker until the start of the third round (round progress status), and even if it takes time to digest the round due to delay in launching, etc. It progresses according to the round digestion. Similarly, the confrontation effect (see FIGS. 54 (g), (h1), and (h2)) performed from the third round to the seventh round is also the seventh round as long as the game ball is properly launched. It progresses according to the entry status of the game ball to the V attacker until the end (round progress status), and even if it takes time to digest the round due to delay in launching, it progresses according to the round digestion. I will do it. Then, the confrontation production (VS chance production) ends at the end of the 7th round.

When the 7 rounds of the 7R jackpot game are completed, the sub control board 90 receives the ending command from the main control board 80 (S4410), and the image control board 100 receives the command at the end of the special game from the sub control board 90 based on this (S4410). Receives. As a result, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes from the ally character victory effect shown in FIG. 54 (h1) to the ending effect shown in FIG. 54 (i1), or from the ally character defeat effect shown in FIG. 54 (h2). The variable effect shown in 54 (i2) is obtained. When the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the V round of the 7R 4th jackpot game this time, the ending image related to the ending effect shown in FIG. 54 (i1) (here, the characters "probability change mode entry") is displayed. Will be done. Although not shown, the first embodiment has an ending image in which the characters are displayed as "time saving mode entry" instead of "probability variation mode entry" in the same display mode as in FIG. 54 (i1). .. This is an ending image displayed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the V round of the 7R fourth big hit game. However, since the 7R 4th big hit is a "big hit scheduled to pass through a specific area", it is unlikely that this "time saving mode entry" image will be displayed if the game is played normally. Further, in the case of the 7R fifth big hit game, the screen of the variable effect shown in FIG. 54 (i2) (effect symbols 8L, 8C) regardless of whether the game ball passes through the specific area 39 or not in the V round. , 8R display). The ending image shown in FIG. 54 (i2) is an effect of "indicating a transition to the normal mode".

Here, in the first embodiment, as described above, the ending time specified based on the ending command from the main control board 80 is different between the 7R 4th jackpot and the 7R 5th jackpot. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 7R fourth big hit in the low probability low base state, that is, the display mode of the display screen 7a is changed from the mode of FIG. 54 (h1) to that of FIG. 54 (i1). When changing to the mode, the ending time is 17,000 ms (17 seconds). Further, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the 7R 4th big hit in the low accuracy low base state, that is, the display mode of the display screen 7a is the time saving mode entry image (not shown from the aspect of FIG. 54 (h2)). When changing to the mode, the ending time is 8000 ms (8 seconds). Further, when the 7R fifth big hit is obtained in the low accuracy and low base state, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes from the mode of FIG. 54 (h2) to the mode of FIG. 54 (i2) regardless of whether or not the specific area 39 has passed. The ending time becomes 5000 ms (5 seconds). The reason why the ending time is different in this way is that the ending time is lengthened when the game state after the jackpot game ends is a "probability variation game state (high probability high base state)" which is advantageous for the player. It is effective to positively indicate in the ending effect that the game will shift to the "probability change game state (high probability high base state)", and the game state after the big hit game is "low probability state and non-time saving state (low)". This is because it is not necessary to spend time and dare to notify that the player will be in a normal gaming state, which has no particular advantage in the case of "probability low base state)".

Then, in the first embodiment, when the 7R fifth big hit is obtained, even if the sub control board 90 receives the ending command from the main control board 80 (S4410), the effect (ending effect) corresponding to the ending command is particularly performed. Without this, the display mode of the display screen 7a becomes the mode shown in FIG. 54 (i2) in a short time (5000 ms in this example) after the end of the 7R jackpot game. The display mode shown in FIG. 54 (i2) is a display mode when performing a normal variation effect, that is, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed large in the substantially center of the screen to display the effect symbol variation game effect. It is a display mode when performing. When the 7R 5th jackpot is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed becomes a low base state. Therefore, when returning the display mode of the display screen 7a to the display mode for performing the normal variation effect, , As shown in FIG. 54 (i2), a launch navigation image 8n (here, the characters “left-handed” and the symbol indicating “leftward”) instructing the player to hit left is displayed near the center of the screen.

The above is the basic flow of VS chance production executed in the case of a 7R jackpot. Although the possibility is low, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the 7R 4th big hit, the game state after the big hit game ends is "low probability state and time saving state (low probability high base state)". Become. In this case, in the VS chance production, the ally character defeat production shown in FIG. 54 (h2) is displayed as the ending of the confrontation scene (confrontation production). Then, the ending time specified based on the ending command transmitted from the main control board 80 at the end of the jackpot game is 8000 ms (8 seconds). In addition, although the possibility is low, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 7R 5th big hit, the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a "high probability state and non-time saving state (high probability low base state)". ..

As described above, by performing a series of "VS chance production (specific production)" from the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the 7R jackpot to the end of the 7R jackpot game, the player can start the jackpot game or V. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the start of the round, it becomes difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39, whether or not the game ball has passed, and as a result, it is possible to improve the game interest of the game machine equipped with the V round. It becomes possible to plan. That is, the introduction effect is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the middle of the variation display of the special symbol related to the 7R jackpot, and after the introduction effect is started, the 7R is started from the end (stop display) of the variation display of the special symbol. While the game situation changes from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the V round, the introduction effect does not end at the timing of the situation change, and the background image related to the introduction effect does not change. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the start of the big hit game and the start of the V round, and it becomes difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 in the V round, the presence or absence of passage, and the like.

Further, in the VS chance production, since the confrontation effect performed after the selection effect after the introduction effect has the same mode as the confrontation reach effect performed during the variable display of the special symbol, it is started during the variable display of the special symbol. A special game in which the introduction effect that is continuously performed during the jackpot game (during the 7R jackpot game in Example 1), the selection effect that is performed after the introduction effect, and the confrontation effect that is performed after the selection effect. Despite being inside, it can be expressed as a "series of effects" (development effects as variable effects) related to the variable display of special symbols. This makes it possible to make it more difficult to recognize the start of the big hit game and the start of the V round, and further, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 in the V round, the presence or absence of passing, etc. are further determined. It can be difficult.

Further, the mode of the confrontation effect in the VS chance effect is the same as that of the confrontation reach effect as the variable effect, and the number of the effect modes is also the same (4 types in Example 1). Moreover, the image data used in the confrontation reach production is diverted to the confrontation production in the 7R jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the confrontation effect during the 7R jackpot game without increasing the image data (data amount). In addition to this, for each of the plurality of confrontation productions that can be executed in the VS chance production, a production mode indicating the ending corresponding to V passage and a production mode corresponding to V non-passage are provided. It is possible to increase the variation of the production. From these things, it is possible to enhance the effect of the VS chance effect performed at the time of the 7R big hit, and to direct the player's consciousness to the effect developed on the display screen 7a as much as possible. It is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether or not the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 in the round.

In addition, after starting the VS chance production, when performing a symbol confirmation effect based on the stop display of the special symbol, that is, a symbol performed during the execution of the introduction effect started at the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the 7R jackpot. Since the final effect is performed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to recognize, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the 7R jackpot game has started by displaying the special symbol as a stop, which accompanies this. It is also possible to make it difficult to recognize the start timing of the V round. Furthermore, since "VS chance production" consisting of three productions (directing scenes) of "introduction production (introduction scene)", "selection production (selection scene)" and "confrontation production (confrontation scene)" is performed, 7R Combined with the difficulty in recognizing the design confirmation effect related to the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player the impression that the big hit has occurred. As a result, it is possible to effectively improve the game interest of the 7R jackpot game including the chance round. Further, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the 7R 5th big hit, the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a low probability low base state, but "VS chance production" and "recognition of the symbol confirmation production" By "difficulty", it is possible to reduce the impression that a big hit occurs, so it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the game state becomes a low probability low base state after a chance round.

In addition, by configuring the VS chance production to start from the middle (final stage) of the variable display of the special symbol, the round game (for example, the second round) that is performed relatively early among the multiple round games that make up the jackpot game. ) Is a V round, and the remaining round games (for example, after the third round) can be positioned as a round for notifying the result of the V round. Then, during the period from the middle (late stage) of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the V round, a production time is secured to notify the start and execution (current occurrence) of the V round (chance round). In the period from the end of the V round to the end of the remaining round game, it is possible to secure the effect time for performing the result notification effect and the like. As a result, it is possible to perform the V round at an early stage and then spend the period until the end of the remaining round game for the result notification effect of the V round. In this case, the longer the period until the remaining round game is completed, the more the effect time of the result notification effect can be obtained. Therefore, after the big hit game is started, the V round is performed at the earliest possible timing, and the remaining rounds are performed. It is desirable to make the execution period of the round game as long as possible.

In addition, in the 7R jackpot game accompanied by the VS chance effect, in the third and subsequent round games (3 to 7 rounds), a confrontation effect indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 39 in the previous V round The mode of the confrontation effect itself is set according to the result of the previous V round. Further, since the image control board 100 receives the V passage effect designation command (S4418) or the V non-passage effect designation command (S4420) from the sub control board 90 and performs the confrontation effect based on the received command, the confrontation effect is performed. There is no problem that the contents of the above and the result of the previous V round do not match. From these facts, in the remaining round games after the end of the V round, it is possible to perform an interesting production that is consistent with the result of the previous V round, and the production performed in the remaining round games (book). In the example, it is possible to enhance the effect of the confrontation effect).

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in the special electric accessory process of FIG. 32, the big prize opening closing process (S2115) is executed at the end of each round constituting the big hit game. Then, the next round is not started until the closing process of the large winning opening related to each round is completed (completed). Specifically, the processing of S2115, S2116 and the like in FIG. According to the processing of the first embodiment as described above, processing related to each round (large winning opening closing processing), for example, interval period setting processing, input / discharge number matching determination processing, retry operation processing, and error notification processing After confirming the completion, the next round is started, so that each round can be executed appropriately and surely. In addition, if there is a problem in a predetermined round, it is possible to take measures such as solving the problem without moving to the next round, and start the next round with the problem resolved. ..

By controlling in this way, although there is an advantage that each round can be appropriately ended and the next round can be appropriately started, the start time of the next round is delayed and the progress of the jackpot game progresses. It has a problem of being late. In order to solve this, in the jackpot game of the second embodiment, a big winning opening that opens in the previous round (becomes a ball-entry state) and a big winning opening that opens in a later round (becomes a ball-entry possible state). If is different from that of the later round, at least a part of the large winning opening closing process (internal period setting process, input / discharge match determination process, retry operation process, error notification process) related to the previous round is performed. It is supposed to be executed in parallel. As a result, the waiting time until the start of the next round, which is set between the rounds, is made as short as possible, and the jackpot game can proceed quickly and smoothly.

Here, "execution of at least a part of the large winning opening closing process related to the previous round in parallel with the subsequent round" means, of course, all of these processes (interval period setting process, input / discharge match determination process). , Retry operation processing, error notification processing) may be executed in parallel with the subsequent round, or one or more of these processes may be executed in parallel with the later round. The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of rounds (round games), and either the first major winning opening 30 or the second major winning opening 35 is opened for each round (the ball can be entered). It is supposed to be. Further, the large winning openings (first major winning opening 30 or second major winning opening 35) opened in the round are opened in a predetermined opening / closing pattern determined for each round.

[Special electric accessory processing (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing (big hit game) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60. Other control processes, board structure, etc. are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted. Further, S2151 to S2155 of the special electric accessory treatment (S1108) of the second embodiment are the same as the special electric accessory treatment of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Next, when it is determined in S2155 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2155), the first major winning opening closing process described later is performed (S2156), and then the second major winning opening closing process described later is performed (S2157). ), Move to the processing of S2158. Here, although details will be described later, the first big winning opening closing process (S2156) is a big hit game in which when a round for opening the first big winning opening 30 is executed, all the opening and closing operations of the round are performed. This is a process (also referred to as “confirmation process”) to be executed after the end (after the end of the round). Similarly, the second big winning opening closing process (S2157) is that when a round for opening the second big winning opening 35 is executed in the big hit game, after all the opening / closing operations of the round are completed ( This is a process (also referred to as "confirmation process") to be executed after the end of the round.

If it is determined in S2158 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2158), the process proceeds to S2159. The processing of S2159 to S2163 is the same as the processing of the special electric accessory in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in S2155 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2155), the process proceeds to S2171. Since the processing of S2171 to S2175 is the same as the processing of the special electric accessory in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in S2158 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2158), the process proceeds to S2164. Here, as a case where it is determined that it is not the start time of the round, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round, during the execution of the round, or during the large winning opening closing process described later (the first large winning opening closing process or the first). 2 major winning openings are being closed). In S2164, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing operation is in progress, that is, whether or not the predetermined large winning opening opening pattern started in S2160 is being executed (during the round) (S2164). When it is determined in S2164 that the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening is being executed (during the round) (YES in S2164), then it is determined whether or not the round end condition of the running round is satisfied (S2165). If it is determined in S2165 that the round end condition is not satisfied (NO in S2165), the process ends. The round end conditions are the same as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2165 that the round end condition is satisfied (YES in S2165), the round end command of the corresponding round is set (S2166), and the process proceeds to S2167. In S2166, a round end command that can specify the end round is set, such as "1R end command" for the end of the first round and "2R end command" for the end of the second round. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201.

If it is determined in S2164 that the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening is not being executed (during the round) (NO in S2164), the process proceeds to S2170. In S2167, it is determined whether or not the first large winning opening opening round has ended, that is, whether or not the large winning opening opened in the finished round is the first large winning opening 30 (S2167). If it is determined in S2167 that the big winning opening opened in the finished round is the first big winning opening (YES in S2167), the big winning opening related to the first big winning opening is closed (that is, the first big winning opening). In order to execute the mouth closing process (S2156)), the first closing processing flag is turned ON (S2168), and the process shifts to the processing of S2170. On the other hand, in S2167, when it is determined that the big winning opening opened in the finished round is not the first big winning opening, that is, the big winning opening opened in the finished round is the second big winning opening (in S2167). NO), turn on the 2nd closing processing flag (S2169), and process S2170 in order to execute the large winning opening closing process (that is, the 2nd big winning opening closing process (S2157)) related to the 2nd big winning opening. Transition. In S2170, the round counter subtraction process described later is performed (S2170), and the process is completed.

[1st Grand Prize Closing Process]
Next, the first large winning opening closing process (also referred to as “confirmation process” or “first confirmation process”) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. In the first embodiment, as the large winning opening closing process, the large winning opening closing process relating to either the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is performed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the opening operation of the second large winning opening is enabled during the execution of the first large winning opening closing process, and the opening of the first large winning opening is made during the execution of the second large winning opening closing process. It is possible to operate. From this, in the large winning opening closing process of the second embodiment, depending on the situation, the first large winning opening closing process and the second large winning opening closing process may be executed in parallel. It has become.

In the first large winning opening closing process (S2156), first, in S3001, it is determined whether the first closing processing flag is ON (S3001), and when it is determined that the first closing processing flag is not ON (NO in S3001), The process is completed without performing the large winning opening closing process (confirmation process) such as the interval period setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3001 that the first closing processing flag is ON (YES in S3001), then it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the interval period (S3002). If the S3002 determines that it is the start time of the interval period (YES in the S3002), the interval period (measurement) is started (S3003), and the process proceeds to the S3004. If it is determined in S3002 that it is not the start time of the interval period, that is, the interval period is already being executed (measuring) (NO in S3002), the process proceeds to S3004.

In S3004, it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the interval period (S3004), and if it is determined that it is the end time of the interval period (YES in S3004), the first closing processing flag is turned OFF (S3005), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined by S3004 that it is not the end time of the interval period, that is, that the interval period is still being executed (measurement is in progress) (NO in S3004), the first major winning opening closing process is not completed and remains in the continuous state. Finish the process (without completing it). Here, the first large winning opening 30 does not have a specific area 39 (specific area detection sensor 39a) or a movable piece 150 that changes the possibility of guiding the game ball to the specific area, and the ball enters ( Or, it is provided with only the first large winning opening sensor 30a that detects (emission). Therefore, the possibility of ball clogging inside the large winning opening is low, and processing such as input / discharge number matching determination processing, retry operation, and error notification based on input / discharge number mismatch determination processing is not executed. That is, in the large prize opening closing process (first large winning opening closing process) related to the round for opening the first large winning opening 30, the interval period setting process is performed and the large winning opening 35 for the round is opened. It is assumed that other large winning opening closing processes that can be performed in the winning opening closing process (second large winning opening closing process) are not executed. The first large winning opening 30 may also be provided with a sensor for detecting the entry of a ball and a sensor for detecting the discharge.

[2nd prize opening closing process]
Next, the second large winning opening closing process (also referred to as “confirmation process” or “second confirmation process”) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. Inside the second large winning opening 35, a second large winning opening sensor that detects a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35, and a discharge of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 are detected. The non-specific area sensor 49a and the specific area sensor 39a, and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 are guided to either the non-specific area (non-specific area sensor 49a) or the specific area (specific area sensor 39a). The movable piece 150 is provided. Therefore, in the round in which the second special winning opening is opened, particularly in the round in which the movable piece 150 is operated in a predetermined mode, the possibility of ball clogging or the like increases. In the second prize opening closing process related to the round, a process (confirmation process) different from that of the first winning opening closing process is executed.

Specifically, in the second big winning opening closing process (S2157), first, it is determined whether the second closing processing flag is ON (S3051), and when it is determined that the second closing processing flag is not ON (NO in S3051). , The process is completed without performing the big winning opening closing process (confirmation process) such as the interval period setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3051 that the second closing processing flag is ON (YES in S3051), then it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the interval period (S3052). If it is determined in S3052 that it is the start time of the interval period (YES in S3052), the interval period (measurement) is started (S3053), and the process proceeds to S3054. If it is determined in S3052 that it is not the start time of the interval period (NO in S3052), the process proceeds to S3054. Here, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the interval period, the interval period is already being executed (measured), the interval period is after the end and before the retry operation is executed, or the retry operation is executed. It is possible to give a case where the error notification is being executed, a case where the retry operation is completed and before the error notification is executed, or a case where the error notification is being executed.

In S3054, it is determined whether the interval period has ended (S3054), and if it is determined that the interval period has not ended, that is, the interval period is still being executed (measurement is in progress) (NO in S3054), processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval period has expired (YES in S3054), the process proceeds to S3055. Since the processing of S3055 to S3059 is the same as the processing of S2705 to S2709 of the large winning opening closing processing of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

[In / out number matching judgment processing]
Next, the input / discharge number matching determination process (S3059) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. In the second embodiment, the input / discharge number matching determination process (S3059) is not performed in the first large winning opening closing process, but is performed only in the second large winning opening closing process. Therefore, the closing processing flag to be turned off in S2854 and S2862 is set as the second closing processing flag. This corresponds to the processing of S2804 and S2812 of the input / discharge number matching determination processing (S2708) of Example 1. Since the other processes of the input / discharge number matching determination process (S3059) of the second embodiment are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Round counter subtraction process]
Next, the round counter subtraction process (S2170) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. This process is performed after the round end condition is satisfied, that is, after all the opening operations in the round are completed. Then, by this process, if the process of closing the first large winning opening related to the previous round of opening the first large winning opening is completed, the next round of opening the first large winning opening can be executed. .. On the contrary, if the closing process of the first prize opening related to the round for opening the previous first prize opening is not completed, the round for opening the next first prize opening cannot be executed (started). It is said. Similarly, if the process of closing the second major winning opening related to the previous round of opening the second major winning opening is completed, the next round of opening the second major winning opening can be executed. On the contrary, if the closing process of the 2nd prize opening related to the previous round to open the 2nd prize opening is not completed, the round to open the next 2nd prize opening cannot be executed (started). It is said.

Therefore, for example, the process of closing the second large winning opening related to the round (for example, the second round) for opening the second large winning opening and the next round (for example, the third round) for opening the first large winning opening. The opening operation and the opening operation can be executed in parallel. However, unless the closing process of the second major winning opening related to the round (for example, the second round) for opening the second major winning opening is completed, the next round (for example, four rounds) for opening the second major winning opening is further performed. It is not supposed to shift to the eye). Although it is not set in the execution pattern of the round in the jackpot game of this embodiment, when the next round (for example, the fourth round) described above is the round that opens the first big winning opening, the previous round (for example, The next round (for example, the fourth round) may be executed (started) on the condition that the first large winning opening closing process of the third round) is completed. Of course, regardless of which round the big prize opening is open, it is possible not to move to the next round. That is, only one round may be executed in parallel with the predetermined large winning opening closing process.

Specifically, in the round counter subtraction process (S2170), first, it is determined whether or not the next round is a round in which the first large winning opening is opened (S2901). If the S2901 determines that the next round is the round that opens the first prize opening (YES in S2901), then determines whether the first closure processing flag is OFF (S2902), and the first When it is determined that the closing processing flag is not OFF, that is, the closing processing of the first large winning opening is not completed (NO in S2902), the processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the first closing processing flag is OFF (YES in S2902), the process proceeds to S2907.

Also, if S2901 determines that the next round is not a round that opens the first prize opening (NO in S2901), then it determines whether the next round is a round that opens the second prize opening (NO) S2903). In S2903, if it is determined that the next round is a round to open the second big winning opening (YES in S2903), then it is determined whether the second closing processing flag is OFF (S2904), and in S2904. , When it is determined that the second closing processing flag is not OFF (NO in S2904), the processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2904 that the second closing processing flag is OFF (YES in S2904), the process proceeds to S2907.

Here, in S2904, when it is determined that the second closing processing flag is not OFF, that is, the closing processing of the second large winning opening is not completed, the round ended this time is a round for opening the second large winning opening. Yes, there is a case where the closing process of the second prize opening has not been completed yet. That is, this is the case where the rounds for opening the second prize opening are continuously executed. Next, although the round that ended this time is a round that opens the first big prize opening, the second big winning opening closing process related to the previous round that opens the second big winning opening has not been completed. There are cases.

This is because in the second big winning opening closing process related to the round to open the previous second big winning opening, it is determined that the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls do not match in the entry / discharge number matching determination process, and the retry operation process It is conceivable that (also referred to as "movable member operation processing") or error notification processing is performed without determining a match even if a retry operation is performed. In such a case, the round (opening operation) for opening the next second prize opening is not executed (started) until the closing process of the second prize opening is completed. If the match determination is not obtained even if the match determination process is repeated for a predetermined period, the second major winning opening closing process is completed based on the elapse of the predetermined error notification period.

Also, in S2903, if it is determined that the next round is not the round that opens the second big winning opening, that is, it is the final round in the big hit game (NO in S2903), then whether the first closing processing flag is OFF or not Judge (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the first closing processing flag is OFF (YES in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the second closing processing flag is OFF (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the second closing processing flag is OFF (YES in S2906), the process proceeds to S2907. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the first closing processing flag is not OFF (NO in S2905) and when it is determined that the second closing processing flag is not OFF (NO in S2906), the processing ends. That is, when all the opening operations of the final round are completed, it is confirmed that both the first large winning opening closing process and the second large winning opening closing process have been completed, and the process proceeds to the S2907 process. Since the processing of S2907 to S2911 is the same as the processing of special electric accessory processing S2117 to S2121 of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Timing chart]
Further, FIG. 60 shows a timing chart showing an embodiment of a predetermined round in the jackpot game of the second embodiment. In this timing chart, for convenience, the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match in the incoming / outgoing number matching process of the second big winning opening closing process related to the second round, and then the matching determination process of a predetermined number of times is repeatedly executed. However, they do not match, and a retry operation is performed to notify an error. Then, while the second major winning opening closing process is being executed, in parallel with the second major winning opening closing process, three rounds of opening the first major winning opening, which is a different major winning opening from the second round. The aspect of performing the eye is shown.

As shown in this timing chart, in the second embodiment, the second big winning opening closing process related to the previous round, that is, the interval period setting process, the retry operation process, the error notification process, and the error notification process are set between them. The waiting period and the like and the opening operation of the next round (third round) can be executed in parallel. Further, in the second embodiment, in addition to this, the operation of the movable piece 150 in the previous round (second round) (opening / closing operation of the specific area) and the opening operation in the next round (third round) are performed in parallel. And make it feasible.

Further, it is controlled so that the opening operation of the previous round and the opening operation of the subsequent round (the opening operation of the first prize opening and the opening operation of the second prize opening) are not executed in duplicate. However, as shown in FIG. 60, depending on the situation, the operation of the movable piece 150 (opening / closing operation of a specific area) is continued even after all the opening operations of the previous round (second round) are completed (FIG. 60). 2000 ms shown in 60). Further, the specific area sensor 39a is also set as an effective period as an extra period for the continuation period and the predetermined period (900 ms shown in FIG. 60) after the end of the continuation period. That is, the validity period of the game ball detection sensor (specific area sensor 39a) of the second big winning opening in the previous round and the game ball detection sensor (first big winning opening sensor 30a) of the first big winning opening in the next round. May overlap with the validity period of. It should be noted that "the duration and the predetermined period (900 ms shown in FIG. 60) after the end of the duration are set to the validity period of the specific region sensor 39a", but similarly, the non-specific region sensor 49a also has the validity period. It is said that. Since the ball does not enter the second special winning opening 35 after all the opening operations are completed, the second large winning opening sensor 35a may be set as an invalid period, or may be set as a valid period as well. In addition, the valid period or invalid period is for validating or invalidating the privilege grant when passing through a specific area, and the game ball detection function (emission detection function) is from the start of the round. , At least until the end of the error notification period. As a result, even if the game ball is detected during the invalid period, it is possible to determine that the game balls match in the input / output number match determination process.

In this way, the large winning opening closing process related to the previous round and the opening operation of the next round are executed in parallel, the operation of the movable piece related to the previous round (opening / closing operation of a specific area), and the next. The opening operation of the previous round can be executed in parallel, or the validity period of the game ball detection sensor (specific area sensor 39a) related to the previous round and the opening operation of the next round can be executed in parallel. It was possible to do. This made it possible to start the next round quickly. In addition, if there is a discrepancy between the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls in the large winning opening closing process, etc., the match determination process, the retry operation process, and the error notification process that are repeatedly executed are performed in parallel with the next round. As a result, the jackpot game can be executed quickly and smoothly without stalling the progress of the round. Further, as in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment as well, the input / discharge number matching determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle, so that when the input / discharge numbers match, unnecessary operations are not performed. , It becomes possible to complete the large winning opening closing process.

Next, Example 3 of the present invention will be described. In the third embodiment, the process related to the execution of the VS chance effect (specific effect) is different from that of the other examples. In the following, mainly, the parts different from the contents described in the first embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described first embodiment, there are four types of confrontation A to D regarding the confrontation production (confrontation scene) in the VS chance production, and which of the confrontation A to D is executed is VS. It was decided when the chance production was started. That is, the content of the confrontation effect (confrontation effect pattern) to be performed during the VS chance effect is determined based on the specific effect pattern selected and set in the process of S4604 of the specific effect start process (S4302) shown in FIG. It was. Then, the end of the confrontation effect (win / loss of the ally character) is displayed according to the V-passing effect designation command or the V-non-passing effect designation command received by S4418 or S4420 of the reception command analysis process (S4301) shown in FIG. It was a thing. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, which of the confrontations A to D is to be executed is not determined when the VS chance production is started, and the second round of the 7R jackpot game, that is, the timing when the V round is completed. , Decide which of the confrontations A to D to be executed, and decide whether the confrontation effect to be executed is the victory pattern of the ally character (victory effect of the ally character) or the defeat pattern (defeat effect of the ally character). It is supposed to be.

Specifically, in the third embodiment, first, in S4604 of the specific effect start process (S4302) shown in FIG. 46, the effects constituting the VS chance effect, that is, the “introduction effect”, the “selection effect”, and the “confrontation effect”. Of these, the effect patterns of "introduction effects 1 to 3" shown in FIGS. 53 (b) to (d) and "selection effect 1" shown in FIGS. 53 (e) are set. After that, a specific effect start command for starting the VS chance effect is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4605), and the set specific effect start command is sent by the command transmission process (S4006). When transmitted to the image control board 100, the introduction effect 1 shown in FIG. 53B is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, until the second round of the 7R jackpot game is completed, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effects of FIGS. 53 (c) to 53 (e) are produced according to the progress of the game (introduction effect 2 to selection effect 1). Is done. Then, when the second round of the 7R jackpot game is completed, it is decided whether the confrontation effect to be executed this time is confrontation A to D, and the determined confrontation is selected as shown in FIG. 53 (f). After showing the result (selection effect 2), the confrontation effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIGS. 54 (g) to (h1) and (h2)). The determination and execution of the confrontation effect is realized by the received command analysis process of the second embodiment performed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (sub-control unit 90). Hereinafter, the received command analysis process of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As for the received command analysis process of Example 3, among the received command analysis processes (S4301) of Example 1 shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the process shown in FIG. 44 (process after S4412) is shown in FIG. Since this is a substitute for the processing, and S4395 to S4411 in FIG. 43 and S4412, S4413 and S4414 to S4416 in FIG. 44 are the same in the third embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here. In FIG. 61, the same step numbers as in the first embodiment are assigned to the processing contents common to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the reception command analysis process of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the round end command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4450), and when it is determined that the command has not been received (NO in S4450). ), When the process proceeds to S4414 and it is determined that the command has been received (YES in S4450), it is determined whether or not the completed round is two rounds (S4451). The round end command sent from the main control board 80 contains information that can identify the number of rounds to end (end round), similar to the above-mentioned round start command. The effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of rounds of the end round based on the received round end command. Then, when it is determined that the finished round is not two rounds (NO in S4451), the main process is finished as it is. Here, in the third embodiment, when the round end command from the main control board 80 is received, a command indicating how many rounds have been completed is transmitted to the image control board 100 in response to the command. Is configured not to be performed. This is because the CPU of the image control board 100 can specify the current number of rounds by transmitting a round designation command to the image control board 100 by at least the processing of S4415 regardless of the type of the big hit. This is because it is possible to grasp the progress of the game and to execute the effect when performing the effect according to the progress of the big hit game. Of course, as in the case where the round start command is received from the main control board 80, a command for specifying the number of end rounds is transmitted to the image control board 100 based on the reception of the round end command, and an effect display or the like corresponding to the command is transmitted. You may do it.

On the other hand, in S4451, when it is determined that the completed round is two rounds (YES in S4451), it is determined whether or not the V passage flag is ON (S4452), and it is determined that it is ON. (YES in S4452), it means that the game ball has passed the specific area 39 in the V round (V pass), so a table to determine the confrontation effect pattern corresponding to that passage (V pass confrontation effect pattern determination table) Is set (S4453), the V passage flag is turned off (S4454), and then the process proceeds to S4455. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4452 that the V passage flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in S4452), it means that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 39 in the V round (V has not passed). Therefore, in order to determine the confrontation effect pattern corresponding to the non-passage, a table (V non-passage confrontation effect pattern determination table) is set (S4457), and the process proceeds to S4455. Then, in the third embodiment, since the confrontation effect determination random number (random number range: 0 to 99) is provided as various effect determination random numbers acquired in S4501 of FIG. 45, the confrontation acquired in S4501 in S4455. Based on the random number for effect determination and the confrontation effect pattern determination table set in S4453 or S4457, the confrontation effect pattern corresponding to V passing or V non-passing is selected and set (S4455).

Here, the confrontation effect pattern determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, the confrontation effect pattern determination table includes a table for passing V and a table for not passing V. In each table, each of the confrontations A to D and a random value for determining the confrontation effect Correspondence is defined. In each of the production patterns of confrontation A to D corresponding to V passage, the production mode from the start to the end (end) of the confrontation scene is a ally character victory (victory pattern), and V has not passed. Each of the corresponding production patterns A to D is such that the production mode from the start to the end (end) of the confrontation scene is the defeat of the ally character (defeat pattern). Then, in the third embodiment, the selection rate (appearance rate) is different between the confrontations A to D corresponding to the passage of V and the confrontations A to D corresponding to the non-passage of V. Specifically, as the confrontation production pattern selected in the case of passing V, the confrontation D selection rate (50%) is the highest, followed by confrontation C (30%), confrontation B (15%), and confrontation A. The selection rate decreases in the order of (5%). On the other hand, as the confrontation production pattern selected when V has not passed, the confrontation A selection rate (50%) is the highest, and then confrontation B (30%), confrontation C (15%), and confrontation D (5). The selection rate decreases in the order of%). As a result, for example, when the confrontation D is selected as the confrontation effect pattern and the confrontation effect of the confrontation D is executed on the display screen 7a, the possibility of passing V is increased, and the confrontation A is selected as the confrontation effect pattern. When the confrontation effect of confrontation A is executed on the display screen 7a, the possibility of passing V is low. Probability change mode) ”, that is, the reliability (expectation degree) of probability change (V passage) can be made different. In the third embodiment, the selectivity is different between the case of passing V and the case of not passing V for all of the production patterns of confrontation A to D, but the case of passing V and the case of not passing V are different. The confrontation effect pattern determination table may include items having the same selection rate as in the case of. In this way, for the player, is there a high or low possibility of passing V in this big hit, that is, is there a high possibility that the game state after the big hit game will be the "probability change game state (probability change mode)"? It is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to guess whether it is low, and this makes it possible to improve the game interest.

In S4455, the confrontation effect pattern according to the value of the confrontation effect determination random number acquired in S4501 is selected from the confrontation effect pattern determination table set in S4453 or S4457, and the selected confrontation effect pattern is set. .. Next, in S4456, a confrontation effect designation command indicating the confrontation effect pattern set in S4455 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4456). When this set confrontation effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 determines the confrontation effect (confrontation) specified based on the received confrontation effect designation command. Any of A to D) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the confrontation effect to be executed this time. At this time, the display mode of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the selection effect 1 (roulette effect) shown in FIG. 53 (e) to the selection effect 2 (result display of the roulette effect) shown in FIG. 53 (f). .. The switching display from the selection effect 1 to the selection effect 2 is performed from the end of the 2nd round to the start of the 3rd round, that is, in the interval period between the 2nd round and the 3rd round.

After that, at the start of the third round (YES in S4414 → YES in S4415 → YES in S4416), the confrontation production start command is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in S4458 (S4458). When this set confrontation effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 is indicated by the selection effect 2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The type of confrontation effect (any of confrontation A to D), that is, the confrontation scene based on the confrontation effect pattern set in S4455 described above is displayed (see FIG. 54). After that, the CPU of the image control board 100 receives various commands such as a round start command and a round end command from the sub control board 90 until the current big hit game (7R big hit game) is completed, that is, the final round. By the end of, the end of the confrontation production based on this confrontation production pattern (friendly character victory production or ally character defeat production) will be displayed.

In such a configuration of the third embodiment, after the result of the V round, that is, the V passage or the V non-pass in the V round is confirmed, the confrontation effect (confrontation) performed in the VS chance effect based on the result. Since the effect pattern (any of confrontation A to D) of the scene) is determined, it is possible to set the reliability of the probability change (passing V) in the confrontation effect. As a result, before the end of the V round, a plurality of selectable confrontation effect patterns (confrontation A to D) are displayed on the display screen 7a, so that a highly reliable confrontation effect is selected. It is possible to fuel the expectations of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the VS chance production is performed, particularly the game entertainment from the selection production to the confrontation production.

In the third embodiment, the selection (decision) of the confrontation effect pattern is performed, specifically, between the second round and the third round (interval period) after the second round (V round) of the 7R jackpot game is completed. Although it was supposed to be done, the time to select the confrontation production pattern is not limited to this. That is, at least after the result of the V round (passing V / not passing V) is confirmed, it is possible to appropriately select the confrontation effect pattern. Specifically, in the above-mentioned Example 1, the movable piece 150 is in an operating state for 80 ms 80 ms after the first opening start (16000 ms opening start) of the V attacker in the V round (2 rounds) in the V-passing planned jackpot (2 rounds). It was set to the operating state (specific area open) again after the non-operating state (specific area closed). The operation mode of the movable piece 150 is, for example, an operating state (specific area opening) 80 ms after the first opening start of the V attacker (opening start of 16000 ms), the state is maintained for 5000 ms, and the non-operating state (non-operating state) after 5000 ms has elapsed. When the operation state is not changed after that as a specific area closure), the operation control of the movable piece 150 is completed before the first opening of the V attacker (opening of 16000 ms) is completed, and after that, the game ball is specified. There is no possibility of passing through region 39. In this case, the result of the V round (passing V / not passing V) is confirmed before the end of the V round (2 rounds), and the time from the confirmed point to the start of the next round is related to the determination and selection of the confrontation effect pattern. It can be used as the execution time of the effect (selective effect). Alternatively, out of the remaining rounds after the two rounds (V rounds) are completed, the confrontation production pattern is selected (determined) in at least one of the rounds except the final round (7 rounds in the embodiment), and the selection is made. (Decision) It is also possible to perform an effect based on the result (an effect showing the selection result, a confrontation effect based on the selection result (result notification effect), etc.).

Further, there may be a case where the confrontation effect pattern is selected at the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the V round. Even in this case, the result of the V round (passing V / not passing V) is confirmed before the end of the V round (2 rounds), and the time from the confirmation point to the start of the next round is determined and selected as the confrontation production pattern. It is possible to use it as the execution time of the effect (for example, selection effect) related to. When the confrontation effect pattern is selected at the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 39, the confrontation effect pattern selection time may be earlier or later depending on the passage timing. It is also possible to change the production mode of the production (selection production) related to the determination and selection of the production pattern. By doing so, for example, in the case of passing V, before displaying the result of the selection effect (selection effect 2) or displaying the result of the selection effect (selection effect 2) at an earlier timing than in the case of not passing V. It is possible to provide an effect mode that suggests the V passage confirmation in advance, such as performing a notice effect indicating the V passage confirmation at the stage of. It is desirable to set such an effect mode as a so-called "premier effect". Regarding these "timing of selection (decision) of confrontation production pattern", any one timing may be set fixedly, or a random number lottery triggered by a big hit winning or a big hit game start, or a big hit The timing of selection (decision) may be determined each time based on various conditions such as the type of symbol.

Although Examples 1 to 3 have been described above, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the mode of the symbol confirmation effect (fourth effect) when the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) during the execution of the VS chance (introduction effect) related to the 7R jackpot is described as the effect symbol 8. The display size of is made smaller than usual and displayed in the corner of the display screen 7a, the finalized display time is set to a short time (500 ms), and with the passage of the finalized display time (transition from the introduction effect 2 to the introduction effect 3). By erasing the effect symbol 8 from the display screen 7a, it is difficult to recognize the symbol final effect, but the mode that makes it difficult to recognize the symbol final effect is not limited to the embodiment. .. For example, the final display time of the effect symbol 8 may be further shortened, the color of the effect symbol 8 may be lighter than usual or translucent, the number of digits (number) of the effect symbol 8 may be reduced, or the effect symbol 8 may be displayed. It is difficult to recognize the symbol confirmation effect depending on each element such as the display size, confirmation display time, display position, type, content, shape, etc. of the effect symbol 8, such as changing to a symbol or figure that is harder to recognize than the number. It can be an embodiment.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, regarding the production patterns of the "introduction effect" and the "selection effect" that constitute the VS chance effect (specific effect), except for the effect scenes (selection effect 2) showing the selection results of the confrontations A to D. Although it has been described that there is only one effect pattern, for the "introduction effect" and the "selection effect", a plurality of effect patterns are stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90, and the image data related thereto is stored in the image control board. It is assumed that the data is stored in 100 ROMs (image ROMs), and one or both of the "introduction effect" and the "selection effect" are selected at the start of the VS chance effect, and the selected effect pattern is selected. The "introduction effect" and the "selection effect" may be performed based on the above. For example, depending on the effect pattern, the character image that appears in the introductory effect may differ, the background image of the introductory effect or the selected effect may differ, or the mode of the selected effect may differ (for example, roulette effect or darts effect). It is possible to provide an effect pattern of. This makes it possible to diversify specific effects. Further, regarding the "confrontation production" that constitutes the VS chance production (specific production), in the above-described embodiment, the confrontation production (confrontation scene) was started at the start of the third round, but the third round It is not necessary to start the confrontation effect with the start. For example, the above-mentioned selection effect may be performed even after the third round is started, and then the confrontation effect may be started. That is, the start timing of the confrontation effect may be a predetermined time after the result of the previous V round is confirmed, and in the above-described embodiment, after the start of the third round and before the end of the seventh round. It may be at a predetermined time.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the first round and the second round (V round) of the "7R 4th jackpot" and the 1st round of the "7R 5th jackpot" are the second big winning openings. By making the opening and closing operation of 35 (V attacker) the same and making the player recognize these rounds as one "chance round", when the chance round is started, "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R" It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine which of the "fifth jackpot" has occurred. Then, in the 7R 4th jackpot, when the interval period to reach after the second and subsequent opening of the V attacker ends, the process proceeds to the 3rd round, whereas in the 7R 5th jackpot, the interval to reach after the second and subsequent opening of the V attacker. At the end of the period, it proceeded to 2 rounds (V round), and after opening the V attacker for a short time (100 ms) in the round, it proceeded to 3 rounds (see FIG. 49). For this reason, until the end of the "chance round", the mode of opening and closing of the V attacker is the same for "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R 5th jackpot", but when proceeding to the 3rd round after that, The opening and closing operation modes of the V attackers are slightly different, and the opening and closing operation modes of the 1-round and 2-round V-attackers are not completely the same.

On the other hand, by completely matching the opening and closing operation modes of the 1st and 2nd round V attackers in the "7R 4th jackpot" and the "7R 5th jackpot", the "7R 4th jackpot" and the 7R 5th jackpot are completely matched. It is also possible to make it more difficult to distinguish it as a "big hit". Specifically, for example, among the opening patterns shown in FIG. 49, the final opening of the V attacker in the second round of "7R 4th jackpot" is performed with an opening time (instantaneous opening and closing) of 100 ms (0.1 seconds). By performing the final opening of the V attacker in the first round of "7R 5th jackpot" as the first opening in the second round with an opening time (instantaneous opening and closing) of 100 ms (0.1 seconds). , It is possible to completely match the opening / closing operation mode of the V attacker. As a result, it becomes extremely difficult to determine which of "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R 5th jackpot" has occurred through the opening / closing operation mode of the V attacker. Also in this case, the VS chance effect (specific effect) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as in the above-described embodiment until the end of the second round (until the start of the third round). Therefore, it is difficult to determine which of the "7R 4th big hit" and the "7R 5th big hit" has occurred even through the effect display. As a result, at least until the end of the second round (until the start of the third round), it is extremely difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39, the presence or absence of passage, and the like. It becomes.

However, as in the above-described embodiment, the opening and closing operation modes of the V attackers in the 1st and 2nd rounds are not completely matched between the "7R 4th jackpot" and the "7R 5th jackpot", and 3 rounds are passed through the chance round. Although it is difficult to determine whether "7R 4th jackpot" or "7R 5th jackpot" has occurred by slightly changing the opening / closing operation mode of the V attacker when proceeding to, the third round starts from the end of the chance round. By paying close attention to the opening / closing operation mode of the V-attacker, the determination can be made for the time being. By intentionally leaving room for such discrimination, it is difficult to discriminate the type of 7R jackpot and whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39, but it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of detecting it. Will be. Regarding the match / mismatch of the opening / closing operation modes of the V attackers in the 1st and 2nd rounds, not only the 7R jackpot, but also the "12R 2nd and 3rd jackpot" and the "2R 7th and 8th jackpot" in the above-described embodiment. (The same applies to "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" in which the number of rounds is the same.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a big hit and a miss are provided as a result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, but in addition to this, a “small hit” may be provided. However, when the big winning opening is opened in a special game related to a small hit (small hit game), the opening time is not a long time (for example, 30 seconds) like a big hit, but a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds). .. When such a small hit is provided, for example, it is provided together with the "2R big hit" as a hit to open the big winning opening twice in 0.9 seconds, and the "small hit" and the "2R big hit" are distinguished (discrimination). By making it difficult to hit the ball and setting the 2R jackpot to the above-mentioned "V-passing scheduled jackpot (probability variation jackpot)", it is possible to obtain so-called "latent probability variation" playability. Further, in the case of performing a small hit game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened, the movable piece 150 is not operated during the small hit game. That is, it is assumed that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 during the small hit game, and the high probability state is not given based on the occurrence of the small hit.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the valid period of the specific area 39 is set to a period during which the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is being executed and the specific area is in the open state, and 1000 ms after the specific area is changed from the open state to the closed state. However, the period is not limited to this. For example, during the execution of the specific area opening / closing operation pattern, all may be set to the valid period, or during the execution of the specific area opening / closing operation pattern, all the periods after the first opening state may be set as the valid period. In addition to these, a predetermined period after the end of the specific area opening / closing operation pattern may be set as the valid period.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the V attackers in the first to second rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V (12R second jackpot, 7R fourth jackpot, 2R seventh jackpot), except for the 15R jackpot. The first round of the jackpot game related to the opening pattern (including the interval period between rounds) of the 2nd jackpot 35) and the jackpot scheduled to not pass V (12R 3rd jackpot, 7R 5th jackpot, 2R 8th jackpot) The opening pattern of the V attacker was set to the same pattern, and it was difficult to distinguish the first and second rounds of the jackpot scheduled to pass V from the first round of the jackpot scheduled to pass V. In other words, at first glance at the opening and closing operation of the V attacker when the chance round is started, it may be that the chance round is due to the V-passing jackpot (for example, 7R 4th jackpot), or the V-non-passing jackpot (for example, 7Rth). It was difficult to tell whether it was due to (5 big hits). Regarding the number of rounds that make up this chance round, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a total of two rounds, the first round and the second round, were set as chance rounds, but the number of rounds is limited to two rounds such as three rounds and four rounds. It's not a thing. For example, the rounds that make up the chance round are the first to third rounds, for a total of three rounds, the second round is the V round (specific round), and the first and third rounds are open by the V attacker. The round (non-specific round) in which the movable piece 150 does not operate may be used. In this case, the opening pattern of the V attacker in the V round (second round) of the V-passing jackpot (for example, the 7R 4th jackpot) is set to a pattern in which the game ball is likely to enter (a pattern in which the ball is easy to enter). , The opening pattern of the V attacker in the V round (2nd round) of the big hit scheduled to not pass V (for example, 7R 5th big hit) is set as a pattern in which the possibility of entering the game ball is low (a pattern in which it is difficult to enter). Then, the opening pattern of the V attacker from the 1st round to the 3rd round of the jackpot scheduled to pass V (mode of opening / closing operation) and the opening pattern of the V attacker from the 1st round to the 3rd round of the jackpot scheduled to pass V (mode of opening / closing operation) The opening pattern of the V-attackers in the first and third rounds of both jackpots may be set so that the opening / closing operation mode) is the same. That is, there is a difference in the opening time of the V attacker in the V round between the planned V-passing jackpot (for example, 7R 4th jackpot) and the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot (for example, 7R 5th jackpot), but the time difference is the remaining unspecified. The rounds are used to match the opening patterns of the V attackers, and the opening patterns of the two jackpot V attackers are matched. The opening pattern of the V attacker according to such a configuration (modification example 1) will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 63 shows the V attacker opening operation from the first round to the third round according to the modification 1 of the “7R 4th jackpot” as the V-passing scheduled jackpot and the “7R 5th jackpot” as the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot. It shows an open pattern). In this modification 1, for both the "7R 4th jackpot" and the "7R 5th jackpot", the opening patterns of the V attackers in the 1st and 2nd rounds are the "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R 4th jackpot" of the above-described embodiment. Although it is the same as "7R 5th jackpot", the third round is different from the above-described embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, the large winning opening 30 opened in the third round is the first large winning opening 30, but in this modified example 1, the V attacker (second large winning opening 35) is used instead of the first large winning opening 30. The third round is a non-specific round (a round in which the movable piece 15 does not operate). Then, the opening pattern of the V attacker in the third round of the "7R 4th jackpot" is changed to the short opening of the V attacker in the second round of the "7R 5th jackpot" (100ms) and the 3 rounds with the interval period (2000ms) in between. The pattern is such that the V-attacker opening of the eyes and the same opening operation are performed. That is, the first V-attacker opening in the third round of the "7R 4th jackpot" is performed in the same manner as the V-attacker opening in the second round of the "7R 5th jackpot", and the 3rd round of the "7R 4th jackpot". The second and subsequent V-attacker opening in the eye is performed in the same manner as the V-attacker opening in the third round of "7R 5th jackpot". In the first modification, the opening of the V-attacker in the third round of the "7R fifth jackpot" is the same as the opening of the V-attacker in the second round of the "7R fourth jackpot" (similar to the above-described embodiment). It is supposed to be done at. That is, after the V-attacker was opened until 16000 ms (16 seconds) had elapsed from the start of the round, 1000 ms (1 second) was closed between each opening, and 1000 ms (1 second) was opened once. It is assumed that the opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds) once and the opening of 1000 ms (1 second) twice are performed in this order.

According to this modification 1, it is possible to completely match the mode of opening / closing operation of the V attacker from the start of the 1st round to the end of the 3rd round between the “7R 4th big hit” and the “7R 5th big hit”. As a result, it becomes impossible to visually determine which of "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R 5th jackpot" has occurred through the opening / closing operation of the V attacker. Further, in the present modification 1, the specific effect (VS chance effect) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as in the above-described embodiment until the third round is completed, so that the effect display can also be performed. , It is difficult (impossible) to determine which of "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R 5th jackpot" has occurred. When the above-mentioned specific effect (VS chance effect) is performed in the present modification 1, for example, the timing of the second V attacker opening start in the third round for the 7R fourth jackpot, and the third round for the 7R fifth jackpot. Control (display control) to advance the specific effect so that the confrontation effect (result notification effect) shown in FIG. 54 is started at the timing of the start of the eyes (at the timing of the start of opening the first V attacker) may be performed. As a result, also in this modification 1, it is possible to increase the difficulty (difficulty) of discriminating the 7R jackpot type from both the opening / closing operation mode and the effect display mode of the V attacker, and the result notification of at least the third round is possible. It is extremely difficult (substantially impossible) to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39, the presence or absence of passage, etc. by the time the result of the previous V round (chance round) is shown by the production. Possible).

In the first modification, the opening pattern of the second and subsequent V attackers in the third round of the "7R 4th jackpot" and the opening pattern of the V attacker in the third round of the "7R 5th jackpot" are in the above-described manner. The mode is not particularly limited as long as it is difficult to determine the type of jackpot (substantially impossible). Further, in the "7R 4th jackpot" and "7R 5th jackpot" of the modified example 1, the round games after the 4th round may be, for example, the round games after the 3rd round of the above-described embodiment. Alternatively, the round game after the fourth round of the above-described embodiment may be performed.

Further, in the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 63, the first round and the third round following the second round (V round) are set as non-specific rounds, and the V-passing planned jackpot (for example, 7R fourth jackpot) and the V-non-passing are not passed. The mode of opening and closing operation of the V attacker in the 1st to 3rd rounds was the same as the planned jackpot (for example, 7R 5th jackpot), but the 1st round was not the same as the 3rd round of the 1st to 3rd rounds. It is also possible to match the mode of opening / closing operation of the V attacker by using two rounds of (non-specific round) and the second round (V round). That is, even with the configuration in which the first opening (opening of 100 ms) in the third round of the 7R fourth jackpot shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 is performed as the final opening of the second round, the mode of opening / closing operation of the V attacker can be changed. It is possible to match. Specifically, the opening of 100 ms existing after the last 1000 ms opening of the second round shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 is performed not as the third round but as the second round. In this case, the interval between the second round and the third round shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 is the closing time of the V attacker in the second round, and the closing time of 2000 ms in the third round in the upper part of the figure is the interval. .. In this way, when the V round is the second round, the first to third rounds are set depending on the setting mode (combination) of the opening pattern of the V attacker in the specific round of the second round and the non-specific rounds following the specific round. In addition to the eyes, even in the first and second rounds, the mode of opening and closing operation of the V attacker is matched between the V-passing jackpot (for example, 7R 4th jackpot) and the V-non-passing jackpot (for example, 7R 5th jackpot). It becomes possible. Then, by matching the opening and closing operations of the V attackers in the first and second rounds, it is possible to use the first large winning opening 30 instead of the V attackers in the third round, and the V attacker opening pattern can be used. It is possible to expand the range of design of round games while ensuring that it is difficult to distinguish the type of jackpot based on.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second round is the V round, including the modified example 1, but the round to be the V round is not limited to the second round, and the number of rounds is the V round. It doesn't matter if it is. It is difficult to determine from the opening / closing operation (opening pattern) of the V attacker whether the V-passing scheduled jackpot (for example, 7R 4th jackpot) or the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot (for example, 7R 5th jackpot) has occurred. Any number of rounds may be the V round, as long as it is possible (practically impossible). In other words, a configuration in which a non-specific round exists before a specific round (V round), a configuration in which a non-specific round exists after a specific round (V round), or a specific round (V) as in the above-mentioned modification 1. It is possible to adopt various configurations such as a configuration in which a non-specific round exists before and after the round). Specifically, for example, the third round may be a V round, or the first round may be a V round. If the third round is a V round, for example, the first and second rounds of the "7R 4th jackpot" of the above-described embodiment are opened in a short time (for example, 100 ms), and the third round is performed. The V-attacker opening may be performed in the same manner as in the second round of the 7R fourth jackpot of the above-described embodiment. Then, in the same manner as the opening / closing operation of the V attackers in the first to third rounds, the opening / closing operation of the V attackers in the first to third rounds of the "7R fifth big hit" may be performed. On top of that, the same specific effect (VS chance effect) as in the above-described embodiment may be performed until the end of the third round. By doing so, it is possible to obtain the same action and effect as in the above-described embodiment.

Alternatively, when the first round is a V round, one round starts with a V-passing planned jackpot (for example, 7R 4th jackpot) and a V-non-passing scheduled jackpot (for example, 7R 5th jackpot), as in the above-mentioned modification 1. It is possible to completely match the mode of opening / closing operation of the V attacker until the end of 3 rounds so that the type of jackpot that has occurred cannot be determined. The opening pattern of the V attacker according to such a configuration (modification example 2) will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 64 shows the V-attacker opening operation from the first round to the third round in the second modification of the “7R 4th jackpot” as the V-passing planned jackpot and the “7R 5th jackpot” as the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot. It shows an open pattern). Here, in the present modification 2, the first round of the jackpot game is a V round (specific round), the second and third rounds are non-specific rounds, and the opening of the V attacker in the first round is started (first opening). The operation control of the movable piece 150 is started at the start). The operation control of the movable piece 15 (the operation pattern of the movable piece 150) is the same as that of the above-described embodiment. That is, when 80 ms have elapsed from the start of opening (start of the round) of the V attacker in the first round, the operating state (movable piece solenoid 151 is turned on) and then the non-operating state (movable piece solenoid 151 is turned off) are set for 80 ms. When 2840 ms (about 2.8 seconds) have elapsed in that state, the operating state (movable piece solenoid 151 is turned on) is set again, and this state is maintained until a maximum of 26000 ms (26 seconds) elapses (FIG. 50). reference).

Further, in the 7R 4th jackpot (the jackpot scheduled to pass V) of the present modification 2, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 64, the V attacker is released by 100 ms (0.1 seconds) from the start of the first round, and then After closing for 2000 ms (2 seconds), the V attacker is opened for 16000 ms (16 seconds) (second opening). After that, the opening and closing operation of the V attacker similar to that of the above-described embodiment, that is, after the opening of 16000 ms (16 seconds) is completed, the opening of 1000 ms (1 second) is performed once with the closing of 1000 ms (1 second). One opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds) and two openings of 1000 ms (1 second) are performed in order. Then, as described above, in the present modification 2, the movable piece 150 is continuously in the operating state when 3000 ms (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the first round. Therefore, in the "V-passing planned jackpot" of the second modification, 900 ms has passed since the second V-attacker release (16000 ms release) in the first round was started, that is, after 16000 ms (16 seconds). During 15100 ms (about 15 seconds), the movable piece 150 is in the operating state (specific area open), and the game ball that has entered the V attacker can pass through the specific area 39. In the second round, which is performed after an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds) after the end of the first round, the V attacker is released by 100 ms (0.1 seconds), and then an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds) is set. After that, the V attacker is released in the third round. The opening / closing operation of the V attacker in the third round is performed in the same pattern as the opening / closing operation of the second and subsequent V attackers in the first round.

On the other hand, in the 7R 5th big hit (V unpassed big hit) of the present modification 2, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 64, the V attacker is placed in the first round which is the V round (the specific round in which the movable piece 150 operates). Open for 100ms (0.1 seconds) to finish the first round. Therefore, in the first round (V round) of the jackpot scheduled to not pass through V, only the remaining 20 ms of the opening time of the V attacker overlaps with the operating period (operating state) of the movable piece 150, and the opening time of 100 ms Not only is the possibility of the game ball entering the opening V attacker extremely low, but the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is also extremely low. The opening pattern of the V attacker in the first round is the same as the opening (opening and closing) of the first V attacker in the first round of the 7R 4th jackpot. Then, when the first round is completed, the V attacker of the second round is released after an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds). The opening pattern of the V attacker in the second round is the same as the opening (opening / closing) of the second and subsequent V attackers in the first round of the 7R 4th jackpot. Therefore, the opening pattern of the V attacker in the first round of the 7R 4th jackpot and the opening pattern of the V attacker in the first and second rounds of the 7R 5th jackpot are the same. When the second round is completed, the V attacker in the third round is released after an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds). The opening pattern of the V attacker in the third round is the same as the opening pattern of the V attacker in the second to third rounds (including the interval period) of the 7R 4th jackpot.

As described above, in the present modification 2, as is clear from FIG. 64, the “7R 4th jackpot” as the V-passing planned jackpot and the “7R 5th jackpot” as the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot are used for one round. The mode (opening pattern) of the opening / closing operation of the V attacker from the start to the end of the third round is the same. As a result, also in the present modification 2, as in the above-mentioned modification 1, it is visually determined through the opening / closing operation of the V attacker whether the “7R 4th jackpot” or the “7R 5th jackpot” has occurred. Is impossible. Further, also in the present modification 2, the specific effect (VS chance effect) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as in the above-described embodiment until the third round is completed. However, it is difficult (substantially impossible) to determine which of the "7R 4th jackpot" and the "7R 5th jackpot" has occurred. As a result, also in the present modification 2, when the 7R jackpot occurs, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39, the presence / absence of passing, etc., at least until the end of the third round (until the end of the chance round). It is extremely difficult (substantially impossible) to discriminate (detect). In the second modification, the opening pattern of the V attacker in the third round of the "7R 4th jackpot" and the opening pattern of the second and subsequent V attackers in the third round of the "7R 5th jackpot" are in the above-described manner. The mode is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to make it difficult (substantially impossible) to determine the type of jackpot. Further, the round games after the fourth round of the "7R 4th jackpot" and the "7R 5th jackpot" of the present modification 2 can be dealt with in the same manner as the above-described modification 1.

Further, in the modified example 2 shown in FIG. 64, the second and third rounds following the first round (V round) are set as non-specific rounds, and the V-passing jackpot (for example, the 7R fourth jackpot) and the V-non-passing are scheduled. The big hit (for example, 7R 5th big hit) and the opening and closing operation of the V attacker in the 1st to 3rd rounds were the same, but the 1st round (for example, not the 3rd round of the 1st to 3rd rounds) It is also possible to match the mode of opening / closing operation of the V attacker by using the two rounds of the V round) and the second round (non-specific round). That is, even with the configuration in which the first opening (opening of 100 ms) in the third round of the 7R fifth jackpot shown in the lower part of FIG. 64 is performed as the final opening of the second round, the mode of opening / closing operation of the V attacker can be changed. It is possible to match. Specifically, the opening of 100 ms existing after the last 1000 ms release of the second round shown in the lower part of FIG. 64 is performed not as the third round but as the second round. In this case, the interval between the second round and the third round shown in the lower part of FIG. 64 is the closing time of the V attacker in the second round, and the closing time of 2000 ms in the third round in the lower part of the figure is the interval. .. In this way, when the V round is the first round, the first to third rounds are set depending on the setting mode (combination) of the opening pattern of the V attacker in the specific round of the first round and the non-specific rounds following the specific round. In addition to the eyes, even in the first and second rounds, the mode of opening and closing operation of the V attacker is matched between the V-passing jackpot (for example, 7R 4th jackpot) and the V-non-passing jackpot (for example, 7R 5th jackpot). It becomes possible. Then, by matching the opening and closing operations of the V attackers in the first and second rounds, it is possible to use the first large winning opening 30 instead of the V attackers in the third round, and the V attacker opening pattern can be used. It is possible to expand the range of design of round games while ensuring that it is difficult to distinguish the type of jackpot based on.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, regarding the V attacker opening pattern (opening / closing operation mode), the jackpot game related to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (12R second jackpot, 7R fourth jackpot, 2R 7th jackpot) except for the 15R jackpot. The opening pattern of the second round and the opening pattern of the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass V (12R 3rd jackpot, 7R 5th jackpot, 2R 8th jackpot) are all the same. Was. That is, all of the multiple V attacker releases in the second round (V round) of the V-passing jackpot, and all of the second and subsequent V-attacker releases in the first round of the V-non-passing jackpot. , The same embodiment (see FIG. 49). However, it is not necessary to make all V attacker openings the same. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the first V-attacker release in the second round of the V-passing jackpot and the second V-attacker opening in the first round of the V-non-passing jackpot are 16000 ms (16 seconds). It was supposed to be done once as an opening. Here, the firing performance (rate of fire) of a gaming ball in a pachinko gaming machine is generally designed so that one (100 in one minute) gaming ball can be launched in 600 ms (0.6 seconds). Since it is a target, it is possible to launch 10 game balls in 6000 ms (6 seconds) in calculation. For this reason, during a big hit game, with exceptions such as interruption of launch of the game ball and clogging of the ball, as long as the game ball is normally launched (right-handed in this example), during the opening of 16000 ms (16 seconds). , It is possible for the V-attacker to enter 10 game balls, that is, a predetermined number of game balls that are conditions for ending the round. From this, as long as the V-attacker continues to fire the game ball during the opening from the start of opening 16000 ms (16 seconds), there is a possibility that the round end condition will be satisfied during the opening and the next round will proceed. Even if the round end condition is not satisfied during the opening, there is a high possibility that the round end condition will be satisfied by the subsequent opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds) and the process will proceed to the next round. For this reason, the second and subsequent V attackers are released in the second round of the V-passing jackpot (see FIG. 49), and the third and subsequent V-attackers are released in the first round of the V-non-passing jackpot (see FIG. 49). It is unlikely that you will be struck. In other words, there is a high possibility that the next round will proceed before all of the multiple V-attacker releases have been performed. From this, out of the multiple V attacker releases in the second round of the V-passing jackpot and the multiple V-attacker opening in the first round of the V-non-passing jackpot, at least based on the specified number of balls. By setting the opening patterns up to the opening times in which the round end condition can be satisfied to be the same pattern, it is possible to achieve the playability and action effect of the above-described embodiment.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the opening pattern of the V attacker in the V round, a long opening opening pattern (first opening pattern) having a long opening time and a short opening opening pattern (second opening pattern) having a short opening time are used. And was provided. Specifically, as a long opening opening pattern (V round opening pattern for a jackpot scheduled to pass through V), an opening pattern in which 16000 ms opening is performed once, 1000 ms opening is performed once, 4000 ms opening is performed once, and 1000 ms opening is performed twice in this order. (Opening pattern with opening time of 23000ms) is provided, and as an opening pattern for short opening (V round opening pattern for big hits scheduled to not pass V), opening pattern s opening twice for 100ms opening is performed in this order. (Opening pattern with an opening time of 100 ms) was provided. Of these, the opening pattern for long opening may be any opening time that can increase the possibility of the game ball entering the V attacker (make it easier to enter), and the number of opening times is multiple times. It may be either once or once. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the difficulty (difficulty) of distinguishing between the V-passing jackpot and the non-passing jackpot, it is desirable that the number of times of opening is set to a plurality of times. The opening pattern of multiple opening in the V round is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modification, and the number of opening of multiple opening is appropriately set in consideration of the difficulty of determining the jackpot type. It is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, regarding the opening time of the V attacker when the first round is performed as a non-specific round, the V attacker opening time of the first round (first non-specific round) of the jackpot scheduled to pass V and V not yet. The opening time for the first opening of the V attacker in the first round (second non-specific round) of the planned passing jackpot is set to a short time of 100 ms (0.1 seconds), and the game ball enters the V attacker. It was unlikely (practically impossible) to do so. However, the opening time of the V-attacker in this case may be longer than 100 ms, or may be a time that allows the game ball to enter the V-attacker.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a configuration in which the chance round is performed from the start of the jackpot game, that is, a configuration in which the chance round is performed in the first to second rounds (in the modified example, the first to third rounds) is illustrated. However, the chance round may be performed in the middle of the big hit game or including the end. That is, the opening operation of the V attacker related to the chance round can be performed not only in the first round to the second round (in the modified example, the first round to the third round) but also in other rounds. Further, for all the big hit games, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) are not limited to the above-described examples and modifications, and the present invention. It is possible to take various patterns within the range that does not deviate from the gist of.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the production mode of the ending effect in the set ending period is not limited to that described above. As another aspect of the ending effect, the following may be performed. For example, the 2R 7th jackpot of the embodiment is defined as a "V-passing scheduled jackpot", and has the same number of rounds (2 rounds) as the 2R 8th jackpot, which is a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". In these productions during the jackpot game, by executing a common production so that it is difficult to recognize whether it is the 2R 7th jackpot or the 2R 8th jackpot, the production executed during the ending period (6th specific production or The 7th specific effect) may be used to indicate the game state that shifts after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, in the ending period of 6000 ms of the 2R 7th jackpot, once (within 3900 ms), the 3rd non-notification mode transition effect (for example, defeat effect) common to the 2R 8th jackpot is executed, and the rest of the ending period. During the period of, it is possible to perform an effect (for example, promotion effect, revival effect) indicating that the state shifts to a high probability state.

Further, in the game machine described above, among the plurality of round games constituting the special game, the specific round game may be one round game or a plurality of round games. When a plurality of round games are designated as specific round games, it is possible to determine the end period based on the specific area information after the last specific round game in the special game is completed. For example, it can be determined based on the end of the last specific round game, based on the start of the next round game of the last specific round game, or based on the end of all round games. Is. In the case of a jackpot (specific result) in which the end period is not changed by passing or not passing through the specific area 39, the timing is different from that of the jackpot (specific result) in which the end period is changed by passing or not passing through the specific area 39. You may decide which end period to use. For example, in the case of a big hit (specific result) that does not change the end period, the end period may be determined at a timing before the start of the specific round game (V round), or it is determined with the start of the big hit game. It may be decided before the start of the opening operation of the first round game in the jackpot game. Of course, the end period may be determined at the same timing depending on whether the jackpot does not change the end period or the jackpot changes the end period.

Further, in the game machine described above, a jackpot (specific result) for changing the end period depending on the passage or non-passage of the specific region 39 is provided, but it is also possible to provide a jackpot with a different mode of this change. For example, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is the first specific result, the end period is set to the 10th period when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the end period is set to the 10th period when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. The eleventh period is shorter than that. Then, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is the third specific result, the end period is set to the twelfth period different from the tenth period when the game ball passes through the specific area, and ends when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. The period may be the thirteenth period, which is shorter than the twelfth period.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the ending period (end period) is changed by passing or not passing through the specific area 39, a long time is set when passing and a short time is set when not passing. It is not limited to such an aspect. The end period determining means determines a short time (second period) when the game ball passes through the specific area, and determines a long time (first period) when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. You may try to do it. Further, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the above-mentioned game machine becomes the first specific result and the special game is executed, the end periods of different lengths are determined based on whether or not the game passes through the specific area, and the hit / fail judgment is made. When the result of is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period of the same length may be determined regardless of whether or not the specific area is passed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is exemplified in which a player is given a game privilege that a high probability state is generated based on the fact that the game ball passes through a specific area during a big hit game (during a special game). However, the privilege referred to in the present invention is not limited to the occurrence of a high probability state. For example, it gives some benefit to the player, such as a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is high, and a fluctuation time shortening state (time reduction state) in which the fluctuation time of the identification information is shorter than usual. If so, the content (type) of the benefit does not matter. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area, one privilege may be given or a plurality of benefits may be given. In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to generate a high probability state based on the game ball passing through a specific area, "10000" is set in the probability variation counter, and the number of executions of the special symbol winning / failing determination is 10,000. Until the number of times, in other words, until the next big hit occurs, the specification guarantees a high probability state (so-called "V probability loop machine"), but the value set in the probability change counter is the game machine. It is possible to set as appropriate according to the specifications (specs) of. For example, if the value set in the probability variation counter based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area is set to "150" and the number of executions of the special symbol hit / fail judgment in the high probability state becomes "150", the special symbol from the next time onward is set. The present invention is applied to a gaming machine (so-called "V-probability ST machine") having a specification in which the hit / fail judgment is performed in a low-probability state, that is, a specification in which a high-probability state is not always guaranteed until the next big hit occurs. It is also possible. Alternatively, in addition to the probability variation counter, for example, a counter (big hit counter) that counts the number of big hits in a high probability state is provided, and the number of big hits (count value of the big hit counter) becomes a predetermined number (for example, "5"). Then, the present invention is applied to a game machine (so-called "V probability set machine") having a specification that always (forces) a low probability state after the end of the big hit game related to the predetermined number of big hits (for example, "fifth"). It is also possible to apply.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the control process of preferentially digesting the second special figure hold over the first special figure hold, the so-called special figure 2 priority control process, is not limited to this, and the first special figure hold is not limited to this. May be a control process for preferentially digesting the second special figure hold, a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, that is, a control process of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion.

In the game machine described above, a start port in which a game ball can enter, a variable start port that can be changed into a first mode and a second mode in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode, and At least one of them may be provided, and identification information display means for variablely displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the start port or the variable start port may be provided. In addition, the first hit / fail judgment is made based on the variable entry port that can be changed between the entry-capable state in which the game ball can enter and the entry-inability state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the entry into the starting port. The first hit / fail judgment means to be executed, the second hit / miss judgment means to execute the second hit / miss judgment based on the entry into the variable start port, and the variable when the result of the first hit / miss judgment or the second hit / miss judgment is a hit It may be provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the ball entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. In addition, there are a first game state in which the frequency of entry of game balls into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of game balls into the variable start port is higher than in the first game state. It may be provided with the game state setting means to be set to. Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

[Other]
In a game machine equipped with a conventional privilege determination game, the possibility that a game ball passes through a specific area is defined as a variable entry port related to the passage of the game ball to a specific area (hereinafter, also referred to as "specific variable entry port"). It is common to make it different depending on the opening pattern of. However, in the conventional configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that a special game including a privilege determination game is started, so for the player, the opening of the specific variable entry port is triggered by the start of the special game. It becomes possible to watch the pattern (opening operation). For this reason, for example, it may be possible to determine the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence or absence of passage, etc. at an early stage when the specific variable entry port starts to open, that is, at the beginning of the privilege determination game. .. In this way, if it is possible to determine the possibility of passing the game ball to a specific area, the presence or absence of passage, etc. at the beginning of the privilege determination game, before the result of the privilege determination game is obtained (before the end of the privilege determination game) or the relevant Before the result of the game is notified, the possibility of passing the game ball to a specific area, the presence or absence of passing, etc. will be known, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the privilege determination game and a dilution of its existence value. is there. On the other hand, the following inventions, which make it difficult to recognize that a special game including a privilege-determining game is started and can improve the game interest of a game machine equipped with the privilege-determining game, are described in (1) to the following. (5) is illustrated.
(1) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that allows the game ball to enter during the special game,
A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through a specific area
It is a game machine equipped with
A privilege-determining game execution means for executing a privilege-determining game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game.
A first effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined first effect during the variable display of the identification information,
With
When the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, the first effect executing means stops and displays the first effect in the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it ends after the start of the privilege determination game in the special game after that.

In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The variable entry port is a state in which the game ball cannot enter and a ball in which the game ball can enter, depending on whether the privilege determination game is executed or the privilege determination game is not executed. It can change to a possible state,
When the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, the first effect executing means stops and displays the first effect in the specific mode. After that, in the special game, the variable entry port may be terminated at least once after the ball can be entered.

(2) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that allows the game ball to enter during the special game,
A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through a specific area
It is a game machine equipped with
A privilege-determining game execution means for executing a privilege-determining game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game.
A first effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined first effect during the special game, and
With
When the first effect is executed during the special game, the first effect executing means starts the first effect during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and the first effect is started. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect is ended after the start of the privilege determination game in the special game after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode.

In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The variable entry port is a state in which the game ball cannot enter and a ball in which the game ball can enter, depending on whether the privilege determination game is executed or the privilege determination game is not executed. It can change to a possible state,
When the first effect is executed during the special game, the first effect executing means starts the first effect during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and the first effect is started. The effect may be ended after the variable entry port has been made capable of entering the ball at least once in the special game after the identification information has been stopped and displayed in a specific mode.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
A second effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined second effect during the special game and after the end of the first effect.
A third effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined third effect during the variable display of the identification information,
With
The second effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second effect can be executed in the same manner as the third effect.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (3) above
The third effect executing means can execute the third effect based on an effect mode selected from a plurality of predetermined effect modes.
The second effect executing means can execute the second effect based on an effect mode selected from a plurality of effect modes similar to the third effect that can be executed by the third effect executing means. A game machine characterized by that.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
A fourth effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined fourth effect based on the stop display of the identification information is provided.
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the fourth effect mode includes at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that is more difficult to recognize than the first effect mode.
The fourth effect executing means is
When the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode during the execution of the first effect, the identification information A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth effect based on a stop display is performed in the second effect mode.

In a game machine equipped with a conventional privilege-determining game, it is common to perform an effect of notifying the result of the privilege-determining game (hereinafter, also referred to as "result notification effect") during a special game. However, in the conventional result notification effect, whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area at a time such as when the privilege determination game is completed during the special game or when the result of the privilege determination game is confirmed. In many cases, the indicated image (for example, a character image such as "V") is simply displayed. In this case, the effect of the effect performed during the special game including the privilege determination game cannot be sufficiently obtained, and there is a possibility that the game interest may be deteriorated. On the other hand, the invention that makes it possible to enhance the effect of the effect performed during the special game including the privilege determination game and to improve the game interest of the game machine equipped with the privilege determination game is as follows. Examples are shown in (6) to (14).

(6) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that allows the game ball to enter during the special game,
A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through a specific area
It is a game machine equipped with
A privilege-determining game execution means for executing a privilege-determining game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game.
A special game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game, and
With
The special game production execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that during the special game after the privilege determination game is completed, the special game effect is executed in an effect mode showing the result of the privilege determination game.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above
The special game effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that during the special game before the end of the privilege determination game, the special game effect is executed in an effect mode that does not show the result of the privilege determination game.

(8) In the gaming machine according to (6) or (7) above.
A production mode storage means for storing a plurality of production modes of the special game effect executed during the special game after the privilege determination game is completed is provided.
The special game effect executing means executes the special game effect after the privilege determination game is completed, based on an effect mode selected from a plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means. A game machine featuring.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above
In addition, as an effect mode showing the result of the privilege determination game, a passing mode indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area and a non-passing mode indicating that the game ball has not passed through the specific area are provided. Have
Each of the plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means is provided with an effect mode corresponding to the passing mode and an effect mode corresponding to the non-passing mode. ..

(10) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that allows the game ball to enter during the special game,
A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through a specific area
It is a game machine equipped with
A privilege-determining game execution means for executing a privilege-determining game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game.
A special game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game, and
With
The special game effect executing means is characterized in that, during the special game and after the end of the privilege determination game, as the special game effect, a result notification effect indicating the result of the privilege determination game is started. ..

(11) In the gaming machine according to (10) above.
A storage means for storing a plurality of production modes of the result notification effect, and
A selection means for selecting an effect mode of the result notification effect to be executed from a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means, and
With
The selection means selects the effect mode of the result notification effect before the end of the privilege determination game.
The special game effect executing means starts the result notification effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means.
A game machine characterized by that.

(12) In the gaming machine according to (11) above.
The special game effect executing means is characterized in that, during the special game, before the end of the privilege determining game, as the special game effect, a selection effect indicating the result of selection by the selection means is executed. Machine.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (12) above.
The special game effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the result notification effect, which is during the special game and started after the end of the privilege determination game, is executed in a mode according to the result of the privilege determination game. ..
In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (13) above,
The special game effect executing means may execute the result notification effect, which is during the special game and starts after the end of the privilege determination game, as a series of effects after the end of the privilege determination game.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (13) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the period from the end of the privilege determination game to the end of the special game is longer than the period from the start of the special game to the end of the privilege determination game.

In addition, as a conventional game machine, regarding the granting of benefits, a game ball that has entered a predetermined variable entry port during a special game is distributed to a specific area or a non-specific area by a distribution device in the variable entry port. There is known a game machine that gives a privilege when a game ball passes through a specific area. If a sorting device is provided inside the variable ball inlet in this way, a game ball may be caught in a movable portion of the sorting device, resulting in ball clogging. When such a situation occurs, in the worst case, the game ball that has entered the variable entrance may not be distributed to the specific area side, and the player may miss the opportunity to give the privilege. Further, conventionally, in a game machine having a discharge device such as a payout device, when such a ball jam occurs, there is a game machine having a control for eliminating the ball jam by executing a predetermined retry operation. .. However, in the big hit game, there is a possibility that the big hit game may be stagnant in the middle simply by performing a retry operation or the like to solve a problem such as a ball jam. In addition, if the jackpot game is stagnant, the player may lose the interest in the game. The inventions (15) to (28) exemplified below have been made in view of such circumstances, and are intended to allow the jackpot game to proceed quickly and smoothly and to improve the interest of the game.

(15) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game that changes the variable entrance port to a ball-entry state, and
A ball entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entry port, and
Discharge detection means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball entry detection means, and
A movable member is provided, which is arranged on a path until the game ball detected by the ball entry detection means is detected by the discharge detection means, and can change the flow direction of the game ball by performing a predetermined operation. It ’s a game machine,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
In the round game, the variable entry port is set to be in a ball-entry state or a ball-incapable state in a predetermined pattern.
In the case of executing the predetermined round game, after the last ball-entry state in the round game is completed, the variable entry port is set to the ball-incapable state and the predetermined confirmation process is executed.
In the confirmation process, at least
A match determination process for determining whether or not the number of balls entering the variable entry port and the number of ejections in the round game match based on the detection results of the entry detecting means and the discharging detecting means.
It has a movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entering the variable ball entry port and the number of ejected balls do not match in the match determination process.
The match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during the period before the execution of the movable member operation process.
If it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entering and ejecting the variable ball entry port matches before the execution of the movable member operation process, the confirmation process is performed without executing the movable member operation process. A game machine characterized by ending.

(16) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
The first variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter.
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
A ball entry detection means for detecting entry into the second variable entry port, and
Discharge detection means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball entry detection means, and
A movable member is provided, which is arranged on a path until the game ball detected by the ball entry detection means is detected by the discharge detection means, and can change the traveling direction of the game ball by performing a predetermined operation. It ’s a game machine,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games, and one of the first variable entry port and the second variable entry port changes to a ball-entry state for each round game. Be done,
In the case of executing the predetermined round game in which the second variable entry port is in a ball-entry state, the second variable entry port is entered after the last ball-entry state in the round game is completed. It executes a predetermined confirmation process as an impossible state,
In the confirmation process, at least
A match determination process for determining whether or not the number of balls entered into the second variable entry port and the number of ejected balls in the round game match based on the detection results of the entry detecting means and the discharging detecting means.
Based on the determination that the number of balls entering the second variable ball entry port and the number of ejected balls do not match in the match determination process, the movable member operation process for operating the movable member is provided.
As the special game, there is a first round game in which the first variable entry port is in a ball-entry state, and a second round game in which the second variable ball entry port is in a ball-entry state. The execution pattern of the round game includes a special game having a pattern of executing the first round game following the second round game.
In the case where the confirmation process is executed after the special game is executed and the last ball-entry state in the second round game is completed, at least a part of the confirmation process is performed in the first round game. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be performed during execution.

As a result, without waiting for the completion of the confirmation process, the confirmation process of the predetermined round game and the next round game of the predetermined round game (the state in which the next round game can be entered) are executed in parallel. It is possible to proceed with the big hit game quickly and smoothly. This is a pattern in which a continuous round game is composed of a second round game in which the second big winning opening is in a ballable state and a first round game in which the first big winning opening is in a ballable state (1st round game). It is possible by having a special game having (or vice versa).

(17) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game that changes the variable entrance port to a ball-entry state, and
A ball entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entry port, and
The first discharge detecting means and the second discharge detecting means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball entry detecting means, and
A movable member that guides a game ball detected by the ball entry detection means to a specific region or a non-specific region by performing a predetermined operation is provided.
A game machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball passing through the specific area.
The first emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area.
The second emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball that has passed through the specific area.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
As the round game, at least
A specific round game in which the variable entry port can be entered and the game ball can be guided to a specific area or a non-specific area.
It has a non-specific round game that guides the game ball to a non-specific area while making the variable entry port capable of entering the ball.
In the case of executing the predetermined round game, after the last ball-entry state in the round game is completed, the variable entry port is set to the ball-incapable state and the predetermined confirmation process is executed.
In the confirmation process, at least
Whether or not the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls in the round game match is based on the detection results of the entry detecting means, the first discharging detecting means, and the second discharging detecting means. Match judgment processing and
It has a movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entering the variable ball entry port and the number of ejected balls do not match in the match determination process.
As the special game, a special game having the specific round game and the non-specific round game, and having a pattern in which the specific round game is executed next to the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game. Prepare
When executing the special game, the gaming machine characterized in that the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game executed after the non-specific round game. ..

In a specific round game in which a movable member is operated to distribute a game ball that has entered the variable entry port to a specific area or a non-specific area, there is no possibility of causing ball clogging in the variable entry port. Higher than a specific round game. Therefore, by performing the confirmation process in the specific round game, it is possible to accurately detect and eliminate the ball clogging and the like. In addition, since the specific round game is an important round game whether or not to grant benefits, if a ball jam occurs before the start of the specific round game, there is a possibility of causing unexpected damage to the player. .. Therefore, even in a round game before the start of a specific land game and in a non-specific round game in which the same variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered, by performing confirmation processing, ball clogging or the like can be caused in the non-specific round game. It is possible to start a specific round game after confirming that there is no such thing, or if there is a ball jam, etc., after accurately finding and eliminating it. As a result, it becomes possible to start the specific round game in a normal state without ball clogging, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering unexpected damage.

(18) In the gaming machine according to (15) above.
When executing the confirmation process, the game machine is characterized in that the next round game can be executed after the confirmation process is completed.

(19) In the gaming machine according to (16) above
A gaming machine characterized in that at least the movable member operation process among the confirmation processes related to the second round game can be performed during the execution of the first round game.

(20) In the gaming machine according to (16) or (19) above,
A game machine characterized in that at least the match determination process among the confirmation processes related to the second round game can be performed during the execution of the first round game.

(21) In the gaming machine according to (16), (19) or (20) above,
As the special game, the one-round game and the second-round game are included, and in the execution pattern of the round game, following the second-round game, the first-round game and the second-round game Including a first special game with a pattern to perform in sequence,
In the case where the confirmation process is executed after the first special game is executed and the last ball-entry state in the second round game is completed.
At least a part of the confirmation process can be performed during the execution of the first round game, which is the next round game of the second round game, and the first round game is followed by the first round game. A gaming machine characterized in that if a two-round game is scheduled to be executed, the second round game is not executed until the confirmation process is completed.

(22) In the gaming machine according to (17) above.
At least, a game characterized in that the confirmation process is executed in both the first specific round game executed in the special game and the non-specific round game executed immediately before the specific round game. Machine.

(23) In the gaming machine according to (17) or (22) above.
As the special game, the specific round game and the non-specific round game are included, and the specific round game is executed next to the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game, and the non-specific round game is executed thereafter. Including a first special game with a pattern to perform a specific round game,
In the case of executing the first special game, the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game executed after the non-specific round game, and the last said A game machine characterized in that the match determination process and the movable member operation process are not executed in the non-specific round game executed after the specific round game.

(24) In the gaming machine according to (16), (17), (19) to (23) above.
The match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during the period before the execution of the movable member operation process.
If it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entering and ejecting the variable ball entry port matches before the execution of the movable member operation process, the confirmation process is performed without executing the movable member operation process. A game machine characterized by ending.

(25) In the gaming machine according to (15), (16), (18) to (21) above.
The emission detecting means includes a first emission detecting means and a second emission detecting means.
When the movable member performs a predetermined operation, the game ball detected by the ball entry detection means is guided to a specific region or a non-specific region.
A game machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball passing through the specific area.
The first emission detecting means detects a game ball passing through the non-specific area and
The second emission detecting means is a gaming machine characterized by detecting a gaming ball passing through the specific region.

(26) In the gaming machine according to the above (15) to (25)
The second emission detecting means has a valid period in which a privilege is given when a game ball is detected and an invalid period in which a privilege is not given even when a game ball is detected.
After finishing the last ball-entry state in the specific round game, the valid period is continued for the first period while the variable ball-entry port is in the ball-incapable state, and after the first period elapses, the invalid period is set. In the case of
After the invalid period is continued for the second period, the movable member operation process can be executed.
A game machine characterized in that the first match determination process in the confirmation process is executed during the valid period after the end of the last ball-enterable state in the round game.

(27) The game machine according to (26) above, characterized in that the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times in each of the first period and the second period.

(28) In the gaming machine according to the above (15) to (27)
A game machine characterized in that the match determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle from the start of the confirmation process to the end of the confirmation process.

(29) The following configurations can be added to the gaming machines according to (15) to (28) above.
Specifically, in the game machine described above, "as a confirmation process, when it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls do not match, an error is notified in a predetermined mode after a predetermined time has elapsed. Has an error notification process to execute
The match determination process can be executed multiple times during the period before the error notification process is executed.
If it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls match before the error notification process is executed, the confirmation process is terminated without executing the error notification process. " Good.

Further, in the game machine described above, "the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the error notification process.
If it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls match during the execution of the error notification process, the running error notification is terminated and the confirmation process is terminated. " May be good.

Further, in the game machine described above, "the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the error notification.
In the match determination process executed during the error notification, if it is not determined that the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls match, the error notification is terminated after a predetermined period of time, and the confirmation process is performed. It may be "finished".

Further, in the game machine described above, "the error notification process can be executed when the third period elapses after the movable member operation process is completed.
The match determination process can be executed multiple times in the third period.
If it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls match during the execution of the third period, the confirmation process is terminated without executing the error notification process. " Good.

In addition, in the above-mentioned game machine, the specific round game allows the game ball to pass through the specific area, and when the game ball passes through the specific area, a privilege is given. Therefore, this "specific round game" is referred to as "predetermined". It may be a "round game in which the privilege of can be given". On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, the movable member does not operate and the game ball does not pass through the specific area (all pass through the non-specific area), so this "non-specific round game" is referred to as "a predetermined privilege. It may be a "round game without granting".

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine, "a special game having a pattern in which a specific round game is executed next to a non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game" is included in a plurality of round games constituting the special game. It suffices to have a part that is executed in the order of non-specific round game and specific round game, and for other round games, whether it is non-specific round game or specific round game, other rounds It may be a game.

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine, "the first special game having a pattern of executing the first round game after the second round game as the execution pattern of the round game" is the execution of the round game executed in the special game. As a part of the pattern, a second round game in which the second variable entry port is in the ball entry state and a first round game in which the first variable ball entry port is in the ball entry state are continuously executed. It is sufficient if there is a pattern, and the other round games may be the first round game or the second round game. Further, the confirmation process may be executed in a specific second round game, and may or may not be executed in other round games. For example, in a special game composed of 15 round games, the second round is the second round game, the third round is the first round game, and the confirmation process can be executed in the second round game of the second round. If so, the other round game may be any round game, and the confirmation process may or may not be executed. Further, as the special game, it is sufficient to have a special game having such an execution pattern, and in addition, a special game having no such execution pattern may be provided.

Conventionally, in a special game, a game ball passes through a specific area in the large winning opening to give a predetermined privilege, and an ending period is set after all the opening operations in the special game are completed, and during this ending period, a special Some perform an ending effect that notifies the player of the game mode (privilege grant state) that shifts after the game is completed. In the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-161615), a plurality of effects are provided as ending effects, and the ending effect corresponding to the game mode that shifts after the jackpot game ends during the set specific ending period is provided. It is stated to do. However, in such a game machine, regardless of the game mode after the transition, the ending effect composed of the same effect period is executed, so that the ending effect is not sharp and has a low taste. It was. The inventions (30) to (38) exemplified below have been made in view of such circumstances, and by setting the ending period according to the game result, an appropriate ending according to the transitional game state is set. It makes the production feasible and improves the interest of the game.

(30) A winning / failing determination means for making a winning / failing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the result of the hit / fail determination,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A specific area provided in the variable entry port and through which a game ball can pass,
When the result of the hit / fail determination becomes a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entrance port can be changed to a ball-entry state is provided. ,
A game machine capable of granting a predetermined privilege based on the execution of the special game and the passage of the game ball through the specific area.
The special game is composed of a predetermined number of round games.
When the special game is executed, the identification information can be displayed in a variable manner after the end period of a predetermined period has elapsed after all the round games in the special game are completed.
As the end period, an end period determining means for determining one from a plurality of end periods of different lengths is provided.
The end period determining means is a gaming machine capable of determining the end period of different lengths based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

(31) In the gaming machine according to (30) above.
A ball entry port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the game ball is more likely to enter than the first aspect.
A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state or a second game state in which the game ball enters the ball entrance more frequently than the first game state is provided.
As the specific result, the first specific result is obtained.
When the special game is executed with the first specific result in the first game state, the end periods having different lengths are determined based on whether or not the special game is passed.
When the special game is executed with the first specific result in the second game state, the end period having the same length is determined regardless of whether or not the specific area is passed. A game machine to play.

According to such a game machine, when the first specific result is obtained as the specific result and the first specific result is obtained in the (normal) first game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball is low. Determines the end period of different lengths depending on whether or not it passes through a particular area. Further, in the second game state in which the game ball enters frequently, when the first specific result is obtained, the end period of the same length is determined regardless of whether or not the specific area is passed. (That is, the end period does not change). As a result, for example, in the normal state, by changing the end period by passing or not passing through a specific area (giving or not giving a privilege), the variable display of the identification information is started after the end period of an appropriate length has passed. It is possible to give a sharpness to the transition mode of the gaming state. On the other hand, when it is already in the second gaming state (for example, high base state), the end period is not changed by passing or not passing through a specific area (giving or not giving a privilege), so that the playing state during the game is adjusted. It is possible to set an appropriate end period and give a sharpness to the transition mode of the gaming state.

(32) In the gaming machine according to (31) above.
The gaming state setting means is a gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state after the end of the special game can be set to the second gaming state.

(33) In the gaming machine according to the above (30) to (32).
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability or a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability for determining whether the result of the hit / fail judgment is the specific result is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the hit / fail determination probability after the end of the special game is set to the high probability based on the execution of the special game and the passage of the game ball through the specific area.

(34) In the gaming machine according to the above (30) to (33).
The end period effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect during the execution of the end period determined by the end period determining means is provided.
As an effect that can be performed during the end period, a plurality of effects having different production modes and production periods are provided.
The end period effect means is a gaming machine characterized by executing an effect corresponding to the end period determined by the end period determining means.

(35) In the gaming machine according to (34) above.
The end period effect means is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect indicating a game state set after the special game in the end period determined by the end period determining means.

(36) In the gaming machine according to (30) above.
The end period has at least a first period and a second period shorter than the first period.
The end period determining means determines the first period when the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game, and when the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the special game, the said The second period may be determined.

(37) In the gaming machine according to (36) above.
As the specific result, a first specific result and a second specific result are provided.
When the result of the hit / fail determination is the first specific result and the special game is executed, the end period determining means sets the first period when the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game. If the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the special game, the second period is determined.
When the result of the hit / fail determination is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period determining means is the same regardless of whether the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game. A gaming machine characterized in that the end period of the length is determined.

According to such a game machine, it has a first specific result and a second specific result as specific results, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment becomes the first specific result and the special game is executed, the special The end period of different lengths is determined depending on whether or not the game passes through a specific area (passing is the first period, non-passing is the second period). In addition, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period of the same length is determined regardless of whether or not the specific area is passed in the special game ( That is, the end period does not change). As a result, depending on the type of the specific result, it is possible to change the end period by passing or not passing through the specific area (giving or not giving the privilege), or not to change the end period. In addition, this makes it possible to set an appropriate length of the end period depending on the type of specific result, and it is possible to start variable display of the identification information after the end period of the appropriate length has passed. It is possible to give a sharpness to the transition mode of the gaming state.

(38) In the gaming machine according to (36) above.
The end period effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect during the execution of the end period determined by the end period determining means is provided.
As an effect that can be performed during the end period, a plurality of effects having different production modes and production periods are provided.
The end period effect means executes an effect corresponding to the end period determined by the end period determining means.
When the result of the hit / fail determination is the first specific result and the special game is executed, the end period producing means is a game set after the special game in the end period determined by the end period determining means. Perform a state-recognizable production,
When the result of the hit / fail determination is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period producing means is a game set after the special game in the end period determined by the end period determining means. A game machine characterized by performing an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the state.

According to such a game machine, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is the first specific result and the special game is executed, as the effect during the end period, the effect of recognizing the game state set after the special game is provided. Execute. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the effect in which it is difficult to recognize the game state set after the special game is executed as the effect during the end period. As a result, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is the first specific result, if the game ball passes through the specific area, the end period of the first period (long-term) is set, and the game ball passes through the specific area. If not, set the end period of the second period (short period). Then, in the end period of an appropriate length set according to the grant or non-grant of the privilege, it is possible to perform an effect capable of recognizing the game state (for example, high probability state, low probability state, etc.) after the transition. It becomes. In addition, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is the second specific result, it is difficult to recognize the game state (for example, high probability state, low probability state) after the transition in the set end period. It is assumed that the same effect (for example, non-notification effect) is executed regardless of whether or not the specific area is passed. Therefore, when the second specific result is obtained, it is difficult to recognize the game state after the transition in the specific end period without changing the end period set by passing or not passing the specific area. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to set an appropriate length of the end period according to the transition mode of the gaming state and the effect mode performed during the end period. Further, this makes it possible to start the variable display of the identification information after the end period of an appropriate length has passed, and it is possible to give a sharpness to the transition mode of the gaming state.

The patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-161615) has five types of special games A to E, and the number of game balls that can be obtained differs depending on the type of special game (500 to 2000). It is stated that. Therefore, if the special game has a large number of game balls that can be acquired, the game interest will be enhanced, but if the special game has a small number of game balls that can be acquired, the game interest will be reduced and the game motivation will be increased. May decrease. In particular, if the special game acquired as a result of playing the game without acquiring the special game for a long time is a special game with a small number of game balls that can be acquired, there is a possibility that the motivation to play the game is particularly high. There is. The inventions (39) to (47) illustrated below are made in view of such circumstances, and when a jackpot with a relatively low profit for the player occurs, a jackpot with a high profit for the player is generated. Compared to the case where it occurs, it is difficult to understand the start of the big hit game, the player's motivation to play is prevented from decreasing, and the game interest is maintained and improved.

(39) An entry port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that of the first aspect.
A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state or a second game state in which a game ball enters the ball entrance more frequently than the first game state.
Judgment means that makes a judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the result of the determination,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
When the result of the determination becomes a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entrance port can be changed to a ball-entry state is provided.
As the specific result, at least a first specific result and a second specific result are provided.
When the result of the determination is the first specific result, the first special game is executed, and when the result of the second specific result is the second specific result, the second special game is executed.
At least, as an effect that can be executed during the special game, a first special effect that can easily recognize the start of the special game and a second special effect that makes it harder to recognize the start of the special game than the first special effect. Have,
If the result of the determination is the first specific result in at least one of the first gaming state or the second gaming state, the second gaming state is set after the end of the first special game, and the result of the determination is In the case of the second specific result, the first game state is set after the end of the second special game.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first special effect is executed in the first special game and the second special effect is executed in the second special game.

(40) In the game machine of (39) above
Equipped with a specific starting port where game balls can enter
The predetermined condition is satisfied at least based on the game ball entering the specific starting port.
As a result of the determination based on the entry of the ball into the specific starting port, there are a plurality of specific results including the second specific result.
When the result of the determination based on the entry into the specific start port is the specific result, the second specific result is the specific result having the lowest degree of advantage among the plurality of specific results. A game machine to play.

(41) In the game machine of (39) or (40) above
A probability setting means capable of setting the probability that the result of the determination is the specific result to a predetermined probability or a higher probability than the predetermined probability is provided.
As the variable entry port, a specific variable entry port having a specific area inside is provided.
The probability setting means can be set to the high probability after the end of the special game based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game.
As the execution mode of the special game, there is a first execution mode in which the game ball is likely to pass through the specific area, and a second execution mode in which the game ball is unlikely to pass through the specific area.
The second special game is a game machine characterized in that it is executed in the second execution mode.

(42) In any of the game machines (39) to (41) above,
As the specific result, it has a third specific result,
When the result of the determination becomes the third specific result, the third special game is executed.
In at least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, if the result of the determination is the third specific result, the second gaming state is set after the end of the third special game.
In the third special game, the second special effect is executed, and as the second special effect, an effect different from the second special effect executed in the second special game is executed. A featured game machine.

(43) In any of the game machines (39) to (42) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the start timing of the second special effect is earlier than the start timing of the first special effect.

(44) In any of the game machines (39) to (43) above,
The first special effect is an effect different from the variation effect executed during the variation display of the identification information related to the first specific result, and after the end of the variation effect, the start of the first special game is started. It is an effect that starts after executing the start effect shown.
The second special effect is a game machine characterized in that the second special effect is a series of effects starting from the middle of execution of the variable display of the identification information related to the second specific result.

(45) In any of the game machines (39) to (44) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that both the first special game and the second special game can obtain a predetermined amount of game profit.

(46) In the game machine of (44) or (45) above
A gaming machine characterized in that during the execution of the variable display of the identification information related to the second specific result, the effect suggesting that the result of the determination is not the specific result shifts to the second special effect.

(47) In any of the game machines (39) to (46) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second special effect in the second special game, an effect of an effect result suggesting that the result of the determination is not a specific result is executed, and the second special game is terminated.

In addition, in the above-mentioned game machine,
"As a variation effect that starts and ends during the execution of the variation display of identification information
If the result of the determination is a specific result, an effect suggesting that the result of the determination is a specific result (effect of a hit mode) is executed, and if the result of the determination is not a specific result, the result of the determination is specified. It has a specific effect that executes an effect that suggests that it is not a result (an out-of-order effect).
In the second special effect, an effect common to an effect suggesting that the result of the determination in the specific effect is not a specific result (an effect of an out-of-order mode) may be executed. "

In addition, in the above-mentioned game machine,
"As a specific result, we have a third specific result of executing the third special game,
At least as a production that can be performed during the special game, it has a third special production,
The third special effect that can be executed during the special game is at least an effect that is executed during the third special game, and is considered to be an effect that makes it harder to recognize the start of the special game than the first special effect. ,
When the result of the determination becomes the third specific result in the first game state, the third special effect is executed in association with the third special game, and the second game state is set after the end of the third special game. " Good.

In addition, "in the third special effect, an effect suggesting that the result of the determination is a specific result is executed, and the third special game is ended" may be used.
In addition, "as a variation effect that starts and ends during the execution of the variation display of identification information,
When the judgment result is a specific result, an effect suggesting that the judgment result is a specific result is executed, and when the judgment result is not a specific result, it is suggested that the judgment result is not a specific result. It has a specific production that executes the production,
In the third special effect, an effect common to the effect suggesting that the result of the determination in the specific effect is the specific result may be executed. "

As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to notice the start of the special game, and depending on the player, there is a possibility that an advantageous state (second game state) has occurred without the special game being executed. Here, it is possible to make the third special effect the same as the second special effect as an effect mode in which the start of the special game is more difficult to recognize than the first special effect. Further, the second special effect may not execute the start effect.

Furthermore, other inventions related to the above-mentioned inventions are exemplified in the following (48) to (79).
(48) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that allows the game ball to enter during the special game,
A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through a specific area
A privilege-determining game execution means for executing a privilege-determining game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game.
It is a game machine equipped with
A special game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game, and
A storage means for storing a plurality of production modes related to the special game production that can be executed during the special game after the privilege determination game is completed, and
Based on the result of the privilege determination game, a selection means for selecting an effect mode to be executed from a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means, and
Have,
The special game executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the special game effect during the special game after the privilege determination game is completed is executed based on the effect mode selected by the selection means.

(49) In the game machine of (48) above
The selection means is characterized in that, when selecting an effect mode to be executed from the plurality of effect modes, the effect mode to be executed is selected based on a predetermined selection rate according to the result of the privilege determination game. A game machine to play.

(50) In the game machine of (48) or (49) above
The special game effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the special game effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means is executed as a series of effects after the end of the privilege determination game.

(51) In any one of the above (48) to (50)
The special game execution means executes the special game effect during the special game before the end of the privilege determination game in a mode indicating which of the plurality of effect modes is selected. A game machine featuring.

(52) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter when it is closed, and makes it possible for the game ball to enter when it is opened.
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the variable entry port to a specific region by performing a predetermined operation.
A privilege giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through the specific area.
It is a game machine equipped with
The variable ball entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in a predetermined opening pattern during the special game.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
As the round game, at least, a specific round game in which the variable entry port is put into the ball-entry state and the movable member is operated, and the variable entry port is made into the ball-entry state and the movable member is made into the movable member. Has a non-specific round game that does not work,
Of the plurality of round games, the predetermined number of round games can be executed as the non-specific round game, and the round games after the predetermined number of times can be executed as the specific round game.
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game.
With the opening pattern of the variable entrance port from the start of the non-specific round game to the predetermined time after the start of the specific round game when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game. , The opening pattern of the variable entrance port from the start of the non-specific round game to a predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game is the same. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the game machine of (52) above, since the movable member operates in the specific round game, there is a high possibility that the game ball entering the variable entry port will be guided to the specific area and pass through the specific area. It becomes a thing. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball that has entered the variable entry port is not guided to the specific area, and the possibility of passing through the specific area is low or absent. .. Then, the opening pattern of the variable entry port when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the variable entry pattern when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game. The pattern of opening the mouth is similar. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable entrance. As a result, when the variable entrance is opened in the special game, whether the special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) having a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to a specific area, the presence or absence of passage, etc., and further, the privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It is possible to improve the game entertainment of the game machine.

In addition, in "a predetermined time after the start of the specific round game from the start of the non-specific round game when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game", "a predetermined time after the start of the specific round game" ”Includes a predetermined time until the end of the specific round game (during the specific round game) and a predetermined time in the next and subsequent round games (after the next round) performed after the end of the specific round game. .. The next and subsequent round games may be non-specific round games, specific round games, or other round games. Similarly, "a predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game" at a predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game is , Including a predetermined time until the end of the non-specific round game (during the non-specific round game) and a predetermined time in the next and subsequent round games (after the next round) performed after the end of the non-specific round game. It's a waste. The next and subsequent round games may be non-specific round games, specific round games, or other round games.

(53) In the game machine of (52) above
It is assumed that one round game is completed when at least a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable entry port.
The predetermined number of game balls are variably inserted by the predetermined time after the start of the specific round game in the first special game and the predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game in the second special game, respectively. A game machine characterized in that it is configured so that it can enter the ball mouth.

(54) In the game machine of (52) or (53) above,
The opening pattern of the variable entry port from the start of the non-specific round game in the first special game to the end of the specific round game, and the above-mentioned from the start to the end of the non-specific round game in the second special game. A game machine characterized by having the same opening pattern as the variable entrance.

(55) In any one of the game machines (52) to (54) above,
When the specific round game is executed in the second special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance port in the specific round game is the variable entrance port in the specific round game in the first special game. A game machine characterized by an open pattern in which the possibility of a game ball entering is lower than that of an open pattern.

(56) In any one of the game machines (52) to (55) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first round game of the plurality of round games is executed as the non-specific round game, and the second round game following the execution is executed as the specific round game.

(57) In any one of the game machines (52) to (56) above,
Equipped with an effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect
The effect executing means is characterized in that at least the same effect is executed after the start of the non-specific round game in the first special game and after the start of the non-specific round game in the second special game. A game machine to be.

(58) In any one of the game machines (52) to (57) above,
In addition to the variable entrance, another variable entrance is opened so that the game ball cannot enter, and when it is opened, the game ball can enter. Have and
The other variable entry port is in the special game, and in the non-specific round game and the round game other than the specific round game among the plurality of round games, the ball enters in a predetermined opening pattern. It will be possible
The opening pattern when the other variable entrance opening is opened during the first special game is the same as the opening pattern when the other variable entrance opening is opened during the second special game. A game machine characterized by being.

(59) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter when it is closed, and makes it possible for the game ball to enter when it is opened.
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the variable entry port to a specific region by performing a predetermined operation.
A privilege giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through the specific area.
It is a game machine equipped with
The variable ball entry port is opened and closed during the special game to enter the ball entry state or the ball entry impossible state.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
As the round game, at least, a specific round game in which the variable entry port is put into the ball-entry state and the movable member is operated, and the variable entry port is made into the ball-entry state and the movable member is made into the movable member. Has a non-specific round game that does not work,
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game.
When the non-specific round game is executed in the predetermined number of round games of the first special game and the specific round game is executed in the next round game of the predetermined number of times, the variable in the non-specific round game. The ball entry port is opened at least once, and the variable ball entry port is opened and closed in the specific round game after a predetermined closing time has elapsed.
When the non-specific round game is executed in the predetermined number of round games of the second special game, in the non-specific round game, the non-specific round game in the first special game and the specific round game A gaming machine characterized in that the variable entrance opening / closing operation is performed in the same manner as the opening / closing operation.

According to the game machine of (59) above, since the movable member operates in the specific round game, there is a high possibility that the game ball that has entered the variable entry port will be guided to the specific area and pass through the specific area. It becomes a thing. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball that has entered the variable entry port is not guided to the specific area, and the possibility of passing through the specific area is low or absent. .. Then, the opening and closing operation of the variable entry port when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the variable entry when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game. The opening and closing operation of the mouth is the same. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game from the opening / closing operation of the variable entrance. As a result, when the variable entrance is opened in the special game, whether the special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) having a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to a specific area, the presence or absence of passage, etc., and further, the privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It is possible to improve the game entertainment of the game machine.

(60) In the game machine of (59) above
When the specific round game is executed in the next round game of the predetermined number of times of the second special game, in the specific round game, the variable entry port is entered as compared with the specific round game in the first special game. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable entry port is opened in a manner in which the possibility of entering a game ball is reduced.

(61) In the game machine of (59) or (60) above
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined number of round games is the first round game.

(62) In any one of the above (59) to (61)
Equipped with an effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect
The effect executing means is
A series of effects are executed in the non-specific round game and the specific round game in the first special game.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least in the non-specific round game in the second special game, an effect similar to the series of effects is executed.

(63) In any one of the game machines (59) to (62) above,
In addition to the variable entrance, another variable entrance is opened so that the game ball cannot enter, and when it is opened, the game ball can enter. Have and
The other variable entry port is opened and closed during the special game to be in the ball-entry state or the ball-incapable state, and is the non-specific round game and the non-specific round game among the plurality of round games. In a round game other than the specific round game, the ball can be entered.
The opening / closing operation when the other variable entry port is opened during the first special game and the opening / closing operation when the other variable entry port is opened during the second special game are the same. A game machine characterized in that it is performed in the following manner.

(64) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter when it is closed, and a state where the game ball can enter when it is opened.
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the variable entry port to a specific region by performing a predetermined operation.
A privilege giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through the specific area.
It is a game machine equipped with
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The variable entry port is capable of opening operation within a predetermined opening time during the special game.
As the special game, at least
The predetermined number of round games out of the plurality of round games is set as the first non-specific round in which the first opening operation in which the opening time of the variable entrance is set to the first hour is performed and the movable member is not operated. The next round game of the predetermined number of times is executed, and the second opening operation in which the opening time of the variable entry port is set to the second time longer than the first time is performed, and the movable member is operated. The first special game to be executed as one specific round,
A second special game in which the predetermined number of round games is performed as a second non-specific round in which the first opening operation and the same opening operation as the second opening operation are performed in this order and the movable member is not operated. ,
A game machine characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (64) above, the second opening operation when the first specific round is executed increases the possibility that the game ball enters the variable entry port (the entry becomes easy). Since the movable member operates in the first specific round in which the second opening operation is performed, the game ball that has entered the variable entry port is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area. It is likely to be. On the other hand, in the first non-specific round and the second non-specific round, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball that has entered the variable entry port may not be guided to the specific area and may pass through the specific area. Is low or absent. Then, in the first special game, when the first non-specific round and the first specific round are executed, the variable entrance opening operation (first opening operation, second opening operation) and the second special game The opening operation of the variable entry port when the second non-specific round is executed is the same. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game from the opening operation of the variable entrance. As a result, when the variable entrance is opened in the special game, whether the special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) having a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to a specific area, the presence or absence of passage, etc., and further, the privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It is possible to improve the game entertainment of the game machine.

(65) In the game machine of (64) above
In the second special game, in the next round game of the predetermined number of times, the opening time of the variable entry port is set to be shorter than the second time, and the game ball enters the variable entry port. A gaming machine characterized in that a third opening operation, which is less likely than the first specific round, is performed and the movable member is operated as a second specific round.

(66) In the game machine of (64) or (65) above
The second opening operation is a gaming machine characterized in that the variable entry port is opened a plurality of times within the second time.

(67) In any one of the above (64) to (66)
In the first special game, after executing the round game as the first non-specific round, the round game as the first specific round is executed after a predetermined interval period.
In the second special game, when the round game as the second non-specific round is executed, after the first opening operation is performed, the second opening operation is performed after a closing time similar to the interval period. A game machine featuring.

(68) In any one of the game machines (64) to (67) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined number of round games is the first round game.

(69) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter when it is closed, and a state where the game ball can enter when it is opened.
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the variable entry port to a specific region by performing a predetermined operation.
A privilege giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through the specific area.
It is a game machine equipped with
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The variable entrance is open in a predetermined opening pattern in the round game.
As the opening pattern of the variable entry port, at least a first opening pattern in which the opening time of the variable entry port is a predetermined time and a second opening time in which the opening time is shorter than the first opening pattern. With an open pattern,
As the round game, at least
A first specific round game in which the variable entry port is opened in the first opening pattern and the movable member is operated.
A second specific round game in which the variable entrance is opened by the second opening pattern and the movable member is operated.
It has a non-specific round game in which the variable entry port is opened in a predetermined opening pattern and the movable member is not operated.
The predetermined number of round games among the plurality of round games can be executed as the first specific round game or the second specific round game, and can be executed.
Having either or both of the front round game following the predetermined number of times and the rear round game following the predetermined number of times, and either or both of the front round game and the rear round game is not said. It can be executed as a specific round game,
As the special game, at least the first special game capable of executing the first specific round game and the non-specific round game, and the second special game capable of executing the second specific round game and the non-specific round game. Have,
In the first special game, when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed, the opening pattern of the variable entrance port during the execution period and the second special game are described. A gaming machine characterized in that the opening pattern of the variable entrance port during the execution period when the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed is the same.

According to the game machine of (69) above, the opening pattern of the variable entrance port (first opening pattern) when the first specific round game is executed is the variable insertion when the second specific round game is executed. Since the opening time is longer than the opening pattern of the ball opening (second opening pattern), the possibility of the game ball entering the variable entry opening is higher in the first specific round game than in the second specific round game (entry). Sphere becomes easier). Therefore, in the first specific round game, there is a higher possibility that the game ball is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area as compared with the second specific round game. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball that has entered the variable entry port is not guided to the specific area and does not pass through the specific area. Then, when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game, and the second specific round game and the second special game in the second special game. When a non-specific round game is executed, the opening pattern of the variable entrance port through the round game is the same. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable entrance. As a result, when the variable entrance is opened in the special game, whether the special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) having a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to a specific area, the presence or absence of passage, etc., and further, the privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It is possible to improve the game entertainment of the game machine.

In addition, "having either one or both of the previous round game following the predetermined number of times and the subsequent round game following the predetermined number of times" means that the round game following the predetermined number of times is the predetermined number of times. It includes a case where it exists before the predetermined number of times, a case where it exists after the predetermined number of times, and a case where it exists before and after the predetermined number of times. Further, "one or both of the front round game and the rear round game can be executed as the non-specific round game" means that the round game existing before the predetermined number of times is executed as the non-specific round game. This includes a case where the round game existing after the predetermined number of times is executed as a non-specific round game and a case where the round game existing before and after the predetermined number of times is executed as a non-specific round game. Further, regarding the "first specific round game and the non-specific round game" in the first special game and the "second specific round game and the non-specific round game" in the second special game, the specific round game (first specific). It does not matter which of the round game, the second specific round game) and the non-specific round game is executed first (or later). That is, even if the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is "first" and the non-specific round game is "after", the non-specific round game is "first" and the specific round game (first). It does not matter whether the 1 specific round game or the 2nd specific round game) is "after". Further, "the execution period when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed" means from the start of either the first specific round game or the non-specific round game. The period until the end of the other round game, and the "execution period when the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed" means the second specific round game and the non-specific round game. Refers to the period from the start of one of the round games to the end of the other round game.

(70) In the game machine of (69) above
A gaming machine characterized in that the previous round game is held at least once before the predetermined number of times, and the previous round game is executed as the non-specific round game.

According to the game machine (70), the first special game in which at least one round game following the first specific round game is executed as a non-specific round game, and at least the first special game following the second specific round game. A specification including a second special game in which one round game is executed as a non-specific round game, in other words, a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round) following at least one non-specific round game. In the specification provided with the special game (first special game, second special game) to execute the game), through the one non-specific round game and the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game). The opening pattern of the variable entrance is the same for the first special game and the second special game. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine the type of special game (first special game or second special game) being executed in the specification.

(71) In the game machine of (69) or (70) above
It is characterized in that it has at least one post-round game after the predetermined number of times, and the post-round game is executed as the non-specific round game.

According to the game machine (71), the first special game in which at least one round game following the first specific round game is executed as a non-specific round game and at least one time following the second specific round game. A specification that includes a second special game that executes the round game of the above as a non-specific round game, in other words, at least one non-specific round game after the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game). Opening of variable entry openings through specific round games (first specific round game, second specific round game) and non-specific round games in the specifications equipped with special games (first special game, second special game) to execute The pattern can be the same for the first special game and the second special game. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine the type of special game (first special game or second special game) being executed in the specification. The specifications can include the specifications related to the game machine according to (66) above. That is, after at least one non-specific round game, a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is executed, and the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is executed. Even in specifications that include special games (first special game, second special game) that execute at least one non-specific round game next to, the first special opening pattern of the variable entry port through each round game It is possible to do the same for the game and the second special game.

(72) In any one of the above (69) to (71)
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined number of round games is the first or second round game.

(73) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter when it is closed, and makes it possible for the game ball to enter when it is opened.
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the variable entry port to a specific region by performing a predetermined operation.
A privilege giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through the specific area.
It is a game machine equipped with
The variable ball entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in a predetermined opening pattern during the special game.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
As the round game, at least, a specific round game in which the variable entry port is put into the ball-entry state and the movable member is operated, and the variable entry port is made into the ball-entry state and the movable member is made into the movable member. Has a non-specific round game that does not work,
Of the plurality of round games, the predetermined number of round games can be executed as the specific round game, and the next round game of the predetermined number of times can be executed as the non-specific round game.
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game.
The opening pattern of the variable entry port in the specific round game in the first special game allows the game ball to enter as compared with the opening pattern of the variable entry port in the specific round game in the second special game. It is a highly open pattern,
The opening pattern of the variable entrance port from the start of the specific round to the end of the non-specific round game when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the second It is characterized in that the opening pattern of the variable entrance port from the start of the specific round to the end of the non-specific round game when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the special game is the same. A game machine to be.

According to the game machine of (73) above, the opening pattern of the variable entrance port when the specific round game is executed in the first special game is the case where the specific round game is executed in the second special game. Compared to the open pattern of the variable entrance, the possibility of the game ball entering the variable entrance is higher (the ball is easier to enter), so the first special game is a game compared to the second special game. There is a high possibility that the sphere will be guided to a specific region and pass through the specific region. Then, when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game and the specific round game and the non-specific round game in the second special game. Since the opening pattern of the variable entry port through the round game is the same when the above is executed, the opening pattern of the variable entry opening makes it possible to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game. It becomes difficult. As a result, when the variable entrance is opened in the special game, whether the special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) having a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to a specific area, the presence or absence of passage, etc., and further, the privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It is possible to improve the game entertainment of the game machine.

(74) In the game machine of (73) above
The opening time of the variable entry port based on the opening pattern of the variable entry port from the start of the specific round in the first special game to the end of the non-specific round game, and the specific round in the second special game. A gaming machine characterized in that the opening time of the variable entry port based on the opening pattern of the variable entry port from the start of the non-specific round game to the end of the non-specific round game is the same.

(75) In the game machine of (73) or (74) above
The number of times the variable entry port is opened based on the opening pattern of the variable entry port from the start of the specific round in the first special game to the end of the non-specific round game, and the specific round in the second special game. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of times the variable entry port is opened based on the opening pattern of the variable entry port from the start of the non-specific round game to the end of the non-specific round game is the same.

(76) Identification information display means for variablely displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port, and
A special game execution means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and
A variable entry port that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter when it is closed, and makes it possible for the game ball to enter when it is opened.
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the variable entry port to a specific region by performing a predetermined operation.
A privilege giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance port has passed through the specific area.
It is a game machine equipped with
The variable ball entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered in a predetermined opening pattern during the special game.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
As the round game, at least, a specific round game in which the variable entry port is put into the ball-entry state and the movable member is operated, and the variable entry port is made into the ball-entry state and the movable member is made into the movable member. Has a non-specific round game that does not work,
Of the plurality of round games, the predetermined number of round games can be executed as the non-specific round game, and the next round game of the predetermined number of times can be executed as the specific round game.
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game.
The opening pattern of the variable entry port in the specific round game in the first special game allows the game ball to enter as compared with the opening pattern of the variable entry port in the specific round game in the second special game. It is a highly open pattern,
The opening pattern of the variable entrance port from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the second It is characterized in that the opening pattern of the variable entrance port from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the special game is the same. A game machine to be.

The game machine of (76) is the one in which the execution order of the specific round game and the non-specific round game in the game machine of (73) is reversed. That is, the next round game of the non-specific round game can be executed as the specific round game. In the game machine (76) as well, as in the game machine (73), it is difficult to distinguish between the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable entrance port. As a result, when the variable entrance is opened in the special game, whether the special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) having a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine (detect) the possibility of passing the game ball to a specific area, the presence or absence of passage, etc., and further, the privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It is possible to improve the game entertainment of the game machine.

(77) In the game machine of (76) above
The opening time of the variable entry port based on the opening pattern of the variable entry port from the start of the non-specific round in the first special game to the end of the specific round game, and the non-specification in the second special game. A gaming machine characterized in that the opening time of the variable entry port based on the opening pattern of the variable entry port from the start of the round to the end of the specific round game is the same.

(78) In the game machine of (76) or (77) above
The number of times the variable entry port is opened based on the opening pattern of the variable entry port from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game in the first special game, and the non-specification in the second special game. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of times the variable entry port is opened based on the opening pattern of the variable entry port from the start of the round to the end of the specific round game is the same.

(79) In any one of the game machines (73) to (78) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined number of round games is the first round game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game that changes the variable entrance port to a ball-entry state, and
A ball entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entry port, and
The first discharge detecting means and the second discharge detecting means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball entry detecting means, and
A movable member that guides a game ball detected by the ball entry detection means to a specific region or a non-specific region by performing a predetermined operation is provided.
A game machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball passing through the specific area.
The first emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area.
The second emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball that has passed through the specific area.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
As the round game, at least
A specific round game in which the variable entry port can be entered and the game ball can be guided to a specific area or a non-specific area.
It has a non-specific round game that guides the game ball to a non-specific area while making the variable entry port capable of entering the ball.
In the case of executing the predetermined round game, after the last ball-entry state in the round game is completed, the variable entry port is set to the ball-incapable state and the predetermined confirmation process is executed.
In the confirmation process, at least
Whether or not the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls in the round game match is based on the detection results of the entry detecting means, the first discharging detecting means, and the second discharging detecting means. Match judgment processing and
It has a movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entering the variable ball entry port and the number of ejected balls do not match in the match determination process.
As the special game, a special game having the specific round game and the non-specific round game, and having a pattern in which the specific round game is executed next to the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game. Prepare
When the special game is executed, the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game executed after the non-specific round game. is there.

According to such a game machine, in a predetermined round game, after the last ball-entry state (also referred to as "all open operations of the round game") of the variable entry port is completed, the ball is entered in the round game. A match judgment is made as to whether or not the number and the number of emissions match. That is, in the round game, it is possible to execute a confirmation process for confirming whether all the game balls that have entered the variable entrance port are discharged without causing ball clogging or the like. Further, the confirmation process includes a match determination process and a movable member operation process for operating the movable member when a mismatch is determined in the match determination process, and the movement of the movable member causes ball clogging or the like. The purpose is to eliminate the cause of the inconsistency.

In addition, as a round game in which the variable entry port can be entered, a specific round game in which a movable member can be operated to guide a game ball entering the variable entry port to a specific area or a non-specific area, and a movable game It has a non-specific round game in which a game ball that has entered a variable entry port without operating a member is guided to a non-specific area. Then, the execution pattern of the round game in the special game includes a pattern to be executed in the order of the non-specific round game and the specific round game, and the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game. ..

In a specific round game in which a movable member is operated to distribute a game ball that has entered the variable entry port to a specific area or a non-specific area, there is no possibility of causing ball clogging in the variable entry port. Higher than a specific round game. Therefore, by performing the confirmation process in the specific round game, it is possible to accurately detect and eliminate the ball clogging and the like. In addition, since the specific round game is an important round game whether or not to grant benefits, if a ball jam occurs before the start of the specific round game, there is a possibility of causing unexpected damage to the player. ..

Therefore, even in a round game before the start of a specific land game and in a non-specific round game in which the same variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered, by performing confirmation processing, ball clogging or the like can be caused in the non-specific round game. It is possible to start a specific round game after confirming that there is no such thing, or if there is a ball jam, etc., after accurately finding and eliminating it. As a result, it becomes possible to start the specific round game in a normal state without ball clogging, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering unexpected damage. The "ball entry detection means" may be composed of one detection means or a plurality of detection means.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1.
At least, the confirmation process is executed in both the first specific round game executed in the special game and the non-specific round game executed immediately before the specific round game. Is.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform confirmation processing in a specific round game first executed in a special game and a non-specific round game executed immediately before the specific round game. As a result, the specific round game in the special game can be reliably started in a normal state without ball clogging, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering unexpected damage.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or Reference Invention 1-2.
As the special game, the specific round game and the non-specific round game are included, and the specific round game is executed next to the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game, and the non-specific round game is executed thereafter. With a first special game with a pattern to perform a specific round game,
In the case of executing the first special game, the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game executed after the non-specific round game, and the last said The non-specific round game executed after the specific round game is characterized in that the match determination process and the movable member operation process are not executed.

According to such a game machine, in a special game having a pattern in which a specific round game is executed after the non-specific round game and then the non-specific round game is executed, the non-specific round game and the non-specific round game are followed. Confirmation processing is to be performed with the specific round game executed in. As a result, it is possible to reliably start the specific round game in the special game in a normal state without ball clogging or the like. On the other hand, in the special game, the specific round game is not executed after that, that is, in the non-specific round game executed after the last specific round game, the match determination process and the movable member operation process included in the confirmation process are performed. It is not supposed to be executed.

As a result, even in the same non-specific round game, by preventing unnecessary processing depending on the situation, the processing after all the opening operations in the non-specific round game are completed is simplified, and the jackpot game can be performed. It is possible to proceed smoothly and quickly. In the non-specific round game itself, there is no movement of the movable member, and since the possibility of ball clogging or the like is originally low, there is no need to perform a match determination process, a movable member movement process, or the like. Therefore, if there is no plan to execute the specific land game after that, it is unlikely that a problem will occur even if these processes are not performed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
The match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during the period before the execution of the movable member operation process.
If it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entering and ejecting the variable ball entry port matches before the execution of the movable member operation process, the confirmation process is performed without executing the movable member operation process. Is characterized by terminating.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to execute a plurality of matching determination processes after finishing all the opening operations of the round game and before executing the movable member operation process, and execute the movable member operation process. If it is determined that the match is matched by any of the match determination processes before, the confirmation process can be completed without executing the movable member operation process. This makes it possible to complete the confirmation process at an early stage by starting the match determination process at the earliest possible stage, and even if it is determined that there is a mismatch, the match determination process is performed a plurality of times before the start of the movable member operation process. To be executable. If it is determined that the match is made before the start of the movable member operation process, the confirmation process can be completed quickly without performing unnecessary processes as much as possible by not executing the movable member operation process.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-4.
The second emission detecting means has a valid period in which a privilege is given when a game ball is detected and an invalid period in which a privilege is not given even when a game ball is detected.
After finishing the last ball-entry state in the specific round game, the valid period is continued for the first period while the variable ball-entry port is in the ball-incapable state, and after the first period elapses, the invalid period is set. In the case of
After the invalid period is continued for the second period, the movable member operation process can be executed.
It is characterized in that the first match determination process in the confirmation process is executed during the valid period after the end of the last ball-entry enable state in the round game.

According to such a game machine, the valid period is continued for the first period after all the opening operations in the round game are completed. This is valid even when a game ball that has entered the variable entry port immediately before the end of the opening operation passes through a specific area at a timing after the variable entry port becomes unable to enter. It is intended to be treated as something (giving benefits). However, since such a situation is a rare case, the first match judgment process is executed without waiting for the expiration of the valid period, and if a match is determined, the confirmation process is completed and the jackpot game is played. It is possible to proceed smoothly and quickly. On the other hand, even if it is determined that there is a mismatch, the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times before the start of the movable member operation process, so that the game ball has passed through the specific area during the originally normal period (during the valid period). Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the movable member operation process is executed as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5.
It is characterized in that the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times in each of the first period and the second period.

According to such a game machine, an effective period (first period) that continues after all the opening operations in the round game are completed, and an invalid period (first period) that continues after the valid period has elapsed and before the start of the movable member operation process (the invalid period). In both the second period) and both periods, it is possible to execute the match determination process a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to complete the confirmation process at the earliest possible stage after completing all the opening operations in the round game. Further, even if it is determined that there is a mismatch in the match determination process, the match determination process can be executed many times (at least 4 times or more) before the execution of the movable member operation process. Therefore, if it is determined that the match is made at any stage. It is possible to complete the confirmation process without executing the movable member operation process. As a result, the jackpot game can proceed quickly and smoothly.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-6.
The match determination process is characterized in that it is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle from the start of the confirmation process to the end of the confirmation process.

According to such a game machine, the match determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle during the period from the start of the confirmation process to the end of the confirmation process, that is, during the execution of the confirmation process. As a result, when the match determination process is executed, the start time of the match determination process is set at the time when the match is determined in most cases, the confirmation process is completed as quickly as possible, and it is as wasteful as possible. It is possible to proceed with the jackpot game quickly and smoothly without executing the process.

1 Pachinko game machine, 7 Image display device, 7b Production symbol display area (Production symbol display area), 8 Production design, 20 1st start port, 21 2nd start port, 30 1st prize opening, 35 2nd prize Mouth, 39 specific area, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control), 90 sub Control board (sub-control unit), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a effect 1st special figure hold indicator, 103b effect 2nd special figure hold indicator, 150 movable pieces.

Claims (2)

Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game that changes the variable entrance port to a ball-entry state, and
A ball entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entry port, and
The first discharge detecting means and the second discharge detecting means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball entry detecting means, and
A movable member that guides a game ball detected by the ball entry detection means to a specific region or a non-specific region by performing a predetermined operation is provided.
A game machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball passing through the specific area.
The first emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball passing through the non-specific area.
The second emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball passing through the specific area.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
As the round game, at least
A specific round game in which the variable entry port can be entered and the game ball can be guided to a specific area or a non-specific area.
It has a non-specific round game that guides the game ball to a non-specific area while making the variable entry port capable of entering the ball.
In the case of executing the predetermined round game, after the last ball-entry state in the round game is completed, the variable entry port is set to the ball-incapable state and the predetermined confirmation process is executed.
In the confirmation process, at least
Whether or not the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls in the round game match is based on the detection results of the entry detecting means, the first discharging detecting means, and the second discharging detecting means. Match judgment processing and
It has a movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entering the variable ball entry port and the number of ejected balls do not match in the match determination process.
As the special game, the specific round game and the non-specific round game are included, and the specific round game is executed next to the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game, and the non-specific round game is executed thereafter. With a first special game with a pattern to perform a specific round game,
When the first special game is executed, the confirmation process is executed in the specific round game executed after the non-specific round game, and the non-specific round executed after the last specific round game. A game machine characterized in that the match determination process and the movable member operation process are not executed in the game. Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game that changes the variable entrance port to a ball-entry state, and
A ball entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entry port, and
The first discharge detecting means and the second discharge detecting means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball entry detecting means, and
A movable member that guides a game ball detected by the ball entry detection means to a specific region or a non-specific region by performing a predetermined operation is provided.
A game machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball passing through the specific area.
The first emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball passing through the non-specific area.
The second emission detecting means is supposed to detect a game ball passing through the specific area.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
As the round game, at least
A specific round game in which the variable entry port can be entered and the game ball can be guided to a specific area or a non-specific area.
It has a non-specific round game that guides the game ball to a non-specific area while making the variable entry port capable of entering the ball.
In the case of executing the predetermined round game, after the last ball-entry state in the round game is completed, the variable entry port is set to the ball-incapable state and the predetermined confirmation process is executed.
In the confirmation process, at least
Whether or not the number of balls entered into the variable entry port and the number of ejected balls in the round game match is based on the detection results of the entry detecting means, the first discharging detecting means, and the second discharging detecting means. Match judgment processing and
It has a movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entering the variable ball entry port and the number of ejected balls do not match in the match determination process.
As the special game, a special game having the specific round game and the non-specific round game, and having a pattern in which the specific round game is executed next to the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game. Prepare
The second emission detecting means has a valid period in which a privilege is given when a game ball is detected and an invalid period in which a privilege is not given even when a game ball is detected.
After finishing the last ball-entry state in the specific round game, the valid period is continued for the first period while the variable ball-entry port is in the ball-incapable state, and after the first period elapses, the invalid period is set. In the case of
After the invalid period is continued for the second period, the movable member operation process can be executed.
A game machine characterized in that the match determination process in the confirmation process is executed during the valid period after the end of the last ball-entry state in the round game.

Images